%\iffalse THIS IS A META COMMENT -*- TeX -*- -*- DTX -*-
% File: merlin.mbs
%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
% Max-Planck-Str. 2
% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
% Germany
% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
%
% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
%
% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
% a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
%====================================================================
% Master Bibliography Style
% for customizing bibliographic style files (.bst)
% with the help of docstrip.tex
% and the auxiliary program makebst.tex
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
% (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
% This file supports numerical and author-year citation styles
% for natbib, harvard, astronom, authordate, apalike
% It also supports languages other than English
%--------------------------------------------------------------------
% This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
% (Alternatively, extract documentation driver with option `driver')
%====================================================================
%
%<*!tail>
% (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file)
% ===============================================================
% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
% This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
% more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
%
% This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
% ===============================================================
% Name and version information of the main mbs file:
%\fi
% \ProvidesFile{merlin.mbs}[2007/04/24 4.20 (PWD, AO, DPC)]
%\iffalse
%</!tail>
%<*a&!a>
% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
\long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
%</a&!a>
%<*driver>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
\documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
\usepackage{doc}%
\raggedbottom
\CodelineNumbered
\RecordChanges
% Comment out next line to print coding
\OnlyDescription
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{merlin.mbs}
\end{document}
%</driver>
% END OF META COMMENT \fi
% \CharacterTable
% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \CheckSum{516}
% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
%
% \changes{1.0}{1993 Aug 16}{Initial version}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add multilingual capabilities}
% \changes{2.1--2.5}{1995 May 2}{Changes to \texttt{babel.mbs} parallel 1.3--1.7
% in \texttt{genbst.mbs}}
% \changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Change documentation to \LaTeXe}
% \changes{1.3(2.1)a}{1994 Sep 1}{Alter wording of article title capitalization
% choice}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Add full author name possibilities}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Fix up some punctuations}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add possibility to put titles in quotes}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Accommodate new \texttt{harvard.sty}}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option so year can contain any text}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow edited by to be in parentheses}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow (year) to have no punctuation
% following}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Journal volume numbers with more choice}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Date with no punctuation preceding it}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Editor names can be reversed like authors'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Can abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Released version}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add \texttt{seq-key} option}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Becomes \texttt{merlin.mbs}, with language
% support in additional files}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Allow full author names to be reversed}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add \texttt{isbn} field option}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Citation names can be bold or small caps}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Colon and space may follow year}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Names can be reversed, dotless intials}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Volume, number can be followed by semi-colon}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Allow word editor or ed to be in parentheses}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Abbreviated journal names can have dots removed}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 4}{Fix `edited by' so it is not abbreviated
% automatically with `editor'}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 6}{Re-do head/tail options to allow easy update of
% older \texttt{.dbj} files}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Minimum number of authors can be up to 6, not 5}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date as part of journal spec., for medical
% journals}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Suppress `pages' and `pp'}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date to be `1994 Jul', with or without dot}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Authors as Jones C.T.}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Sort without \emph{von} part}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jul 31}{Release as version 3.2}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Extra labels put in braces so they are treated
% as one unit by natbib}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Publisher's address can precede name}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add full authors only if different from short list}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument to
% \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Fix placement of \texttt{bolden} in
% \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add possibility of date between volume and pages}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Word `and' can be in normal font in citations}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Tech Reports to have titles like books}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Delimit \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright} properly}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add option to sort by year (numerical only)}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 12}{Allow multiple journal-name files}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Allow months in dates even for author-year}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{Fix sorting bug for limited number of authors}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{named} format for author--year cites}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 2}{Blocks can be separated by semi-colons}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Journal names in normal font}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Volume subnumber added to pages}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Book pages in parentheses}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put Jr at end for AGU author style}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put `and' in same font in list and citation}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Allow `et al' to be in normal font}
% \changes{3.6a}{1996 Feb 1}{Fix bugs with \texttt{xand} option}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 2}{Fix small caps with NFSS}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Fix clash of \texttt{emphasize} and
% \texttt{purify\$}}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{alpha}-type style}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 1}{Style alpha is never unsorted}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Allow blanks between blocks}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Publisher in parentheses}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 15}{Allow author-year to be sorted by year}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Cited `and' resets only one attribute}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Allow date to be between volume and number}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab} for \texttt{natbib} 6.3}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Fix coding for adding `page' to journals}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add `volume' to journals}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Remove word `in'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Place publisher before chapter/pages}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Allow period after date}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Commas between blocks, except for article titles
% where period comes}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Allow comma before date}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize incollection organization and
% publisher}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Allow edition to come before publisher}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Allow author--year to be in citation order}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Publisher, address, date can all be in
% parentheses}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 18}{Remove extraneous hyphen before
% \texttt{\char`\\getans}}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Allow pages at end before notes}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Fix bug with quoted titles when title missing}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Fix bug that put comma before publisher in
% parentheses}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Allow AGU author style with full names}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Allow dash for repeated authors, periods
% before notes}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Change case of first note word if mid-sentence}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Option to break long page numbers}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option for titles in guillemets}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option to use underlining for emphasis}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Reorganize options for year in journal spec}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Multiple options in menu}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Fonts for names: can exclude first names,
% use-defined font allowed, improved coding for `and' and `et~al.'}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} consistently in place
% of \texttt{year} alone}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Suppress ISBN number when certain crossrefs
% are present}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add option for comma between year and pages}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Apr 20}{Bug with minimum 6 authors corrected}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{url} field for all styles}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Suppress months in numerical mode}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Author limitation now 99}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{annote} field and annotation}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{issn} field}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Correct spelling of `guillimet'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Make \textsl{et~al.} a variable \texttt{bbl.etal}}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{language} field}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Oct 16}{Add html output possibilities}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress edition conversion in English}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Conf. booktitles are upright if book titles are}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Various extra options for book pages,
% inproceedings, mainly for MPG Jahrbuch}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Jan 13}{For html, newblock just adds period, no new line}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 1}{Do edition suppression properly}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Fix font handling of names}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Test for multipages for word `page(s)' in journals}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Missing years may be left blank, not just ????}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{When key replaces author, leave year blank}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: %Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)
% Add new entries: collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, per option
% \texttt{revdata}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: Add reference component tags (\texttt{bibinfo}
% and friends)}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: incorporate AO's changes with moderations}
% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{PWD: add \texttt{archive} field}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{PWD: Fix improper \texttt{change.case\$} and
% \texttt{bibinfo.check} ordering}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with `in' with articles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{seq-yrr} for reversed year ordering}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{thtit-x} to suppress thesis titles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add line to define \texttt{natexlab} in aux file for harvard}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: bug fix when both \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-jnl} given}
% \changes{4.04}{2002 Sep 13}{PWD: add support for Slovene/Slovenian language}
% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{PWD: bug fix in \texttt{inproceedings} with
% \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{PWD: add \texttt{nmd-2} and \texttt{nmd-3} for use with \texttt{nmdash}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{PWD: add DOI}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: use \texttt{\protect\bslash providecommand}
% instead of \TeX\ commands, but provide \texttt{noprov} option to undo it.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: make \texttt{eid} available not just for Rev\TeX}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 11}{PWD: add \texttt{pg-pre} for total book pages location}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: fix DOI to have no space after colon}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: add options \texttt{ser-vol} and \texttt{ser-ed}}
% \changes{4.11a}{2003 Aug 19}{PWD: fix bug with \texttt{ser-ed} option}
% \changes{4.12}{2003 Sep 8}{PWD: rename \texttt{noprov} to \texttt{plntx} for Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
% \changes{4.12a}{2003 Nov 6}{PWD: fix bug in which comma separators go on wrong side; change was
% originally made in \texttt{makebst} but not in \texttt{merlin}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: fix some bugs in \texttt{inbook} and \texttt{incollection}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{tit-col} for colon after titles}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}, spaceless initials with comma}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{etal-xc} to suppress comma before et al.}
% \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{PWD: add option \texttt{pres} for conference talks, presentations}
% \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{PWD: fix bug in \texttt{proceedings} that suppress number/series at times}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{PWD: add option to allow more than one author in cites before et al.}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{PWD: allow variable number of authors before truncating citation}
%
% \pagestyle{myheadings}
% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{A General Master Bibliography Style}
%
% \title{{\bfseries A Master Bibliographic Style File}\\
% for numerical, author--year, multilingual applications}
%
% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
%
% \GetFileInfo{merlin.mbs}
% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
% version \fileversion{} from \filedate
% \thanks{Work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.00 was supported by the
% American Physical Society}}
%
% \maketitle
%
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
%
% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
%
% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
%
% \section{Introduction}
% A problem facing users of \btx{} is that there is no standard for
% formatting lists of references. Publishers and journals insist
% on completely arbitrary placement of commas, colons, and ordering of
% entries. Furthermore, author--year styles of citations are supported by
% certain special \LaTeX{} packages, but each for only a very limited
% number of bibliographic styles. Finally, most such style files are for
% English only, and any adaptations to other languages must duplicate the
% entire spectrum of such files.
%
% All of these obstacles are in principle easily overcome by simply
% reprogramming \btx{} by means of an appropriate \emph{bibliographic style
% file} (extension \texttt{.bst}). \btx{} is in fact extremely flexible;
% unfortunately its programming language is very low-level, permitting only
% the most basic of hacks for the normal user.
%
% The solution to this is a \emph{generic} or \emph{master bibliographic
% style file} (extension \texttt{.mbs}) containing \dtx{} options for
% alternative coding. By selecting the desired options, one can customize a
% \texttt{.bst} file to one's needs.
%
% This file, \texttt{\filename}, is my latest version of a general-purpose
% \texttt{.mbs} file to meet as many bibliographic needs as possible.
% It was originally assembled from Oren Patashnik's standard files {\tt
% plain.bst} and \texttt{unsrt.bst}, plus his non-standard file {\tt
% apalike.bst}, a very basic author--year citation style.
% It has since evolved extensively as I have added features found in
% available \texttt{.bst} files, and those demanded by publishers or
% suggested to me by many user/contributors.
%
% To produce a customized bibliographic style (\texttt{.bst}) file from this
% master file, simply \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} the `program' \texttt{makebst.tex}.
% When asked for the name of the master file, answer with
% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
% and then reply to the questions in the following menus. The last question
% is whether you want to generate the \texttt{.bst} file right away.
%
% More details on this process and on the options available are to be found
% in the rest of this article.
%
% \section{History of this File}
%
% Since the first release of this generic file, in November 1993, under the
% name \texttt{genbst.mbs}, I have received innumerable
% suggestions for additions, most of which I have tried to include. Often
% this has resulted in reorganizing the coding, and adding new functions.
% The resulting \texttt{.bst} files are now quite different from those of
% Patashnik, although the underlying ideas are the same.
%
% A second version was released shortly afterwards that paralleled the first
% one except that it included support for languages other than English.
% That file was named \texttt{babel.mbs}, following the \texttt{babel}
% system of Johannes Braams. Although I always viewed it as version 2 of
% \texttt{genbst.mbs}, all additions to the one were also included in the
% other. This of course was tedious and prone to error. I looked forward to
% the day when \texttt{babel.mbs} would become the only supported version.
% The reason I was reluctant to do that before was that the overhead per
% language was fairly high, and I dreaded to think how large the file would
% become when 20 or 30 languages were added.
%
% I then found a way to put the language definitions into separate files,
% one per language. This means that new languages do not burden the basic
% file, and that users need only keep those support files that might
% interest him or her. New ones may also be made up locally by hacking an
% existing language definition file. (The file \texttt{english.mbs} is
% supplied only for this purpose.)
%
% For this reason, \texttt{\filename} was released as version~3 of
% \texttt{genbst.mbs} and \texttt{babel.mbs}. In spite of the new name, it
% should be regarded as their direct successor. Needless to say, this means
% that the earlier two \texttt{.mbs} files will no longer be maintained.
%
% To include language support, all explicit English words like
% \textsl{editor} and \textsl{chapter} have been replaced by functions
% whose definitions may be altered in the resulting \texttt{.bst} file
% (less desirable method) or which may be redefined by an external
% language definition file (preferred method). Alternatively, one can select
% the pseudo-language named \texttt{babel} which inserts \LaTeX{} commands
% for the explicit words, the definitions of which must be
% contained in a file called {\tt babelbst.tex}. Only the languages English
% and \texttt{babel} are included internally to \texttt{\filename}; all
% others are contained in external language definition files.
%
% Another new feature is the possibility of including a file containing
% prestored shorthand designations for certain journal names. Such a file
% is provided for physics journals, but others could be made up using this
% one as a model. See Section~\ref{sec:jnames}.
%
% To take advantage of these external files, one must use
% \texttt{makebst} version~3; \texttt{\filename} may still be used with
% earlier versions, but without the external files.
%
% Version~4 arose out of a project by David Carlisle who created a variant
% of \texttt{\filename} for REV\TeX\ and the American Physical Society with
% the help of Mark Doyle of the APS. The main purpose was to add extra
% fields (see page~\pageref{sec:revtex}) that were needed. Subsequently
% Arthur Ogawa revised the code considerably, making it more rational,
% fixing some bugs and adding some extra features.
%
% I was then asked to incorporate all these changes into the official
% version of \texttt{\filename}. This required much debugging, since the
% Ogawa's rationalization upset several of the delicate interplays between
% various options. The result is version~4.0, the work on which has been
% supported by the American Physical Society.
%
% Version~4.0 contains the REV\TeX\ extra fields and the
% Carlisle-Doyle-Ogawa rewrites. An additional feature that derived from
% Carlisle's work on REV\TeX\ is the tagging of the text entries in the
% bibliography. This means the volume number is given as
% |\bibinfo{volume}{5}|. Normally only the number 5 is printed, but another
% program could use this to reconstruct the original database entries.
%
% Arthur Ogawa also added some features to \texttt{makebst} to provide a more
% verbose protocol. As a result, version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be
% used with version~4 of \texttt{makebst}. Older versions of \texttt{\filename}
% will still function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj}
% files created with older versions should still produce the same results with
% \texttt{\filename}~4.
%
% \def\temp{merlin.mbs}\ifx\temp\filename
% This file is now named after the legendary magician in the hope that it
% can produce wonders by incanting the right magic formulas. However, one
% should bear in mind that even Merlin was not omnipotent. It would be too
% much to hope that all bibliographic wishes will be fulfilled quickly and
% easily, but we shall try as best we can. Watch the wizardry at work!
% \fi
%
% \section{About Master Bibliographic Style Files}
%
% For details about how master bibliography style files are to be
% constructed, see the documentation on \texttt{makebst}. Here only a
% rough overview is given.
%
% \subsection{The \dtx{} Program}
% The \dtx{} program, written by Frank Mittelbach, is now a fundamental
% part of the \LaTeXe{} installation. Its original purpose is to remove
% comment lines from documented files, but has the secondary function of
% selecting alternative lines of coding.
%
% A master \btx{} bibliographic style file is one that, when processed by
% \dtx{} with selected options, produces a regular \btx{} \texttt{.bst}
% file with the desired features.
%
% In this sense, \dtx{} functions something like a C preprocessor. In fact,
% Oren Patashnik's original \texttt{.bst} files were all produced from a single
% source file by means of the preprocessor. The advantage of \dtx{} is that
% it is portable to all installations with \TeX.
%
% \subsection{The \dtx{} Batch Job}
%
% The \dtx{} program can be run either interactively, where the user must
% answer questions via the keyboard, or by means of a batch job where all
% the inputs are prepared in a file beforehand. For producing a \btx{}
% style file from a master file, the batch job method is the only feasible
% one, simply because of the large number of options available. (There is
% another reason for employing a batch job: the interactive method adds an
% |\endinput| command at the end, something that \btx{} will protest
% about.)
%
% The batch job files in general do not have any particular extension but I
% use \texttt{.dbj} for \emph{\dtx{} batch job}. These files are useful
% because they document the options used to produce the \texttt{.bst} file,
% and they may be edited to experiment with alternative options.
%
% \subsection{The \texttt{makebst} Program}
%
% It is possible to make up a batch job file by hand using the option
% information listed in Section~\ref{sec:options}, but my accompanying
% program \texttt{makebst} simplifies the task considerably. It reads menu
% information in the master file itself in order to present the user with
% an interactive list of choices, translating the answers into appropriate
% options that are then written to a batch job file.
%
% To run it, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and
% answer the questions. The first of these is whether you want some
% instructions or not, and the second is the name of the \texttt{.mbs} that
% you want to use. The next query is about the name of the desired
% \texttt{.bst} file (which will also be the root name of the batch job).
% After that, all further questions come from menu information in the
% master file.
%
% At the very end, \texttt{makebst} asks if it should run the batch job for
% you. Isn't that a fine service?
%
% \section{Multilingual Adaptation}
% The original \texttt{.bst} files from Oren Patashnik contain explicit
% English words that are output into the final text. Since \LaTeX{} is
% increasingly being used for other languages, and since the official
% version since December 1991 also uses macros in place of explicit words,
% it seems appropriate for \btx{} to follow suit.
%
% In this master bibliographic style file {\tt\filename}, all explicit
% words have been replaced by functions: e.g., the word \textsl{editor} has
% become the function \texttt{bbl.editor}. Depending on the language option
% chosen, this function is defined to be the text {\tt"editor"},
% {\tt"Redakteur"}, or {\tt"redacteur"}, for English, German, and French,
% respectively.
%
% There is another special `language' called \texttt{babel} that instead inserts
% the text |"\bbleditor{}"|; the definitions of these \LaTeX{} commands
% must be in a separate file named \texttt{babelbst.tex} that is read in at
% the start of the bibliography.
%
% Only English and \texttt{babel} are supported directly in
% \texttt{\filename}; all other language definitions are contained in
% separate definition files, e.g., \texttt{french.mbs}, \texttt{german.mbs}.
%
% The language selection is made during the \texttt{makebst} run, which
% asks for the name of the language definition file as the first menu item. If
% either English or \texttt{babel} is wanted, reply with the default, which
% is \texttt{\filename} itself; otherwise give the name of the desired
% language file.
%
% \begin{quote}\slshape
% \textbf{Note:} the language definition files can only be used with
% \texttt{makebst} version~3 or later, and
%
% with an external definition file, the \dtx{} run requires two passes
% through \texttt{\filename}, doubling the processing time.
% \end{quote}
%
% Apart from the language adaptation of the whole bibliography, there is also
% the possibility of switching languages for individual references, so as to
% hyphenate the title properly. This is done with the \texttt{language} field
% and the \verb!\setlanguage! command.
%
% \subsection{Adding a New Language Definition File}
%
% To create a new language definition file, simply take one of the existing
% ones, like \texttt{english.mbs}, and replace the explicit English words
% with their translations. There are, however, a number of points that can
% complicate this procedure.
%
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
% Do not forget to change the documentation in the file, especially
% version number, date, author.
%
% \item
% There are option menus that need to be translated too. It might also be
% desirable to add or remove options. In most cases, the options in the
% language files involve possible abbreviations, like
% \begin{quote}
% \verb!\mes{^^JABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}!\\
% \verb!\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}!\\
% \verb!\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}!\\
% \verb!\getans!
% \end{quote}
%
% In this example, the option \texttt{pp} appears later in the definition
% \begin{quote}
% \verb!FUNCTION {bbl.pages}!\\
% \verb+%<!pp>{ "pages" }+\\
% \verb!%<pp>{ "pp." }!
% \end{quote}
% This a \emph{local} option, that only affects the coding in the definition
% file. It is possible to add more local options.
%
% \item
% However, all options, whether activated by the main file or by the
% definition file, apply to both. In other words, there really is no such
% thing as a local option. In the above example, \texttt{pp} is only
% local because it is never used in \texttt{\filename}.
%
% \item
% Add the name of the language as an option, with
% \begin{quote}
% \verb!\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}!\\
% \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}!
% \end{quote}
% (This is how options are added without |\optdef| and |\getans|.) The
% main file just might recognize it in order to take some
% language-specific action. The least it should do is add a comment at
% the start of the \texttt{.bst} file stating for which language it is to
% be used.
%
% \item
% There could be some problems with edition numbers due to language
% dependent ways of treating ordinal numbers (1st, 2nd, 3rd in English;
% 1$^{\mbox{\scriptsize re}}$, 2$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$,
% 3$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$ in French; 1., 2., 3., in German). Some
% accommodation already exists for the oddball language English, and
% further hacking may be needed for others.
%
% \item
% If there should be any need for a double-quote character in
% the translations (German needs it for umlauts) then there is trouble
% because the \btx{} strings do not allow it. Instead, use the command
% |\qq|, as in the German word |F\qq{u}nfte| for {\sl F\"unfte} (fifth).
% It is then vital to add the option \texttt{umlaut} with
% \begin{quote}
% \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp umlaut,\pc: Activate umlaut command}!
% \end{quote}
%
% Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"|
% within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |F\qq{u}nfte| with |F\^^b unfte|
% and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option.
%
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \subsection{Changing \texttt{babelbst.tex} for a New Language}
%
% Alternatively, a new language can be added by
% modifying the file \texttt{babelbst.tex} and selecting the language {\tt
% babel} for the \texttt{.bst} file. If this is the only language to be used,
% then just change the English words in the definitions.
%
% However, some form of switching would be more desirable. With \TeX\
% version 3, there is a |\language| parameter to control the hyphenation
% patterns, and this could be used to select the correct language. For
% example, if language 0 is English and language 1 German, then put the
% English version of \texttt{babelbst.tex} into \texttt{englbst.tex} and the
% German
% version in \texttt{germbst.tex}. Then \texttt{babelbst.tex} could contain:
% \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
% \ifcase\language \input{englbst} \or \input{germbst}
% \else \input{englbst} \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{quote}
%
% This is of course installation dependent.
%
% \subsection{Extracting the Sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} File}
%
% A sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} (for English) is contained in this master
% file. Extract it with \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. It may be
% edited (and possibly renamed) for other languages as needed.
%
% \subsection{Problem with Edition Numbers}
% Something to note here is the ordinal numbers for editions. \btx{}
% demands that the field \texttt{edition} be given in the database as a word
% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc., or as \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd},
% etc. This is bad policy
% because it is language dependent. So what I do is to test for the words
% \textsl{first} through \textsl{fifth} (case independently) and replace them
% with language-dependent equivalents. If the {\tt<ord>} option is selected,
% these equivalents are ordinal numbers for that language. Any other words
% cannot be interpreted and must be printed as is.
%
% However, if the \texttt{edition} is given as a number, with or without
% following letters, then the numbers 1 through 5 are replaced by their
% words; any higher numbers just have the ordinal ending (\textsl{th}
% in English) added to them.
%
% These numbers are only used with the word \textsl{edition} or
% its equivalent in other languages, so the translators need
% to provide only the one gender, e.g., feminine for both German and
% French.
%
%
% \section{Prestoring Names of Journals}\label{sec:jnames}
%
% The standard \texttt{.bst} files contain the names of some 20 journals
% in the field of computing, stored as macros for easy reference within the
% database \texttt{.bib} files. For example, the \textsl{Journal of
% Computer and System Sciences} can be referred to as \texttt{jcss}.
% With the option \texttt{jabr} (for journal abbreviation) this same
% shorthand produces \textsl{J.~Comput. Syst. Sci.}.
%
% Some \texttt{.bst} files for physics journals include additional journal
% names, and it is conceivable that other faculties might wish to prepare
% their own such lists, with each name present in a full or abbreviated
% form. Such an external file can now be added with \texttt{\filename} and
% \texttt{makebst} version~3.
%
% As a model, I supply a file \texttt{physjour.mbs} with the names of
% physics journals which I have taken from other \texttt{.bst} files.
% I also have a file \texttt{geojour.mbs} with the names of geophysics
% journals, and a contributed file \texttt{photjour.mbs} containing names of
% optics journals.
%
% In fact, version~3.5 can even include multiple journal-name files.
% Thus one can decide whether to include both, one, or none of the above
% files.
%
% \section{HTML Output}
% There is an option \texttt{html} to create a \texttt{.bst} file producing
% hypertext (HTML) output instead of the regular \LaTeX\ code. This is still
% experimental. The resulting \btx\ output will still be a file with extension
% \texttt{.bbl} and will contain the \LaTeX\ special characters, like |\"a| for
% \"a. One must go over the output to convert such characters to the HTML
% equivalents, and to remove curly braces. Only then can it be renamed
% \texttt{.html}.
%
% Three possible lists are offered:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item a simple paragraph for each entry,
% \item a numbered list,
% \item a description list with the key as the label.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \section{Updating Older \texttt{.dbj} Files}\label{sec:update}
% If you have existing \texttt{.dbj} files for generating \texttt{.bst}
% files from the older version \texttt{genbst.mbs}, these may be run with
% \texttt{\filename} by simply changing the name of the source
% \texttt{.mbs} file. For example, where the older \texttt{.dbj} file contains
% the line
% \begin{quote}
% |\generateFile{mystyle.bst}{f}{\from{genbst.mbs}{%|
% \end{quote}
% edit the file so that \texttt{genbst.mbs} is replaced by
% \texttt{\filename}. The resulting \texttt{mystyle.bst} file will then be
% an updated version of the older one, containing all the same features.
%
% Version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be used with version~4 of
% \texttt{makebst}, whereas older versions of \texttt{\filename} will still
% function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj} files created
% with older versions should still produce the same results with
% \texttt{\filename}~4, albeit with different coding.
%
% \section{Acknowledgements}
% I wish to thank all the people who have taken the trouble to send me
% suggestions or special requests. Admittedly, it has been out of
% self-interest on their part, since they had bibliographic needs to be
% met. And I have often questioned the need for many of their demands. Yet,
% that is part of the bibliographic jungle that I am trying to eliminate.
% If I thought that bibliographies were arbitrarily formatted before I
% started this project, I have more than sufficient confirmation since
% then. The fault lies not with the poor contributors, but with the
% publishers who cannot agree on a decent standard.
%
% I want to thank Frank Mittelbach, not only for creating \dtx{}
% in the first place, but also for sending me his bibliographic requirements,
% and for suggesting an improvement to \texttt{makebst}.
%
% David Carlisle has added the REV\TeX\ fields and |\bibinfo| tagging in a
% special variant of \texttt{\filename}; Arthur Ogawa then incorporated
% them into the main file, and overhauled much of the coding to make it
% more legible and rational.
%
% I especially wish to thank Mark Doyle and the American Physical
% Society for supporting the work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.0.
%
% And finally, all of us must thank Oren Patashnik for providing \btx;
% without its flexibility and programmability (in spite of the complexity
% of the language) the master bibliographic styles would not be possible at
% all.
%
% \section{The Options}\label{sec:options}
% Here I present a list of all the \dtx{} options that are
% available in this file {\tt\filename}.
% The normal user can skip this section since he will probably make use
% of the menus via \texttt{makebst}. These are described in
% Section~\ref{sec:menu}. The menus provide much more informative prompts
% than the heavily abbreviated option names listed here. In other words,
% the options described in this section are meant for internal (programmer)
% usage, while the normal interface for the user is the menus.
%
% I have tried to avoid
% conflicts with mutually exclusive options by always letting one dominate if
% more than one has been specified. Such options have the same prefix, such
% as \texttt{nm-rev} and \texttt{nm-init}.
% If one uses \texttt{makebst} to produce the
% \dtx{} batch job, then it is impossible to give mutually
% exclusive options unless one edits the batch file oneself afterwards.
% (Anything is possible with computer freaks!)
%
% Most mutually exclusive options have the same prefix before the hyphen.
%
% \newenvironment{opt}{%
% \begin{list}{}{\labelwidth2cm \leftmargin2.5cm \labelsep1em \rightmargin0pt
% \def\makelabel##1{\ttfamily##1 \hfill}}}{\end{list}}
% \textbf{Citation style:} whether or not a numerical or author--year system
% is to be used.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is numerical, standard \LaTeX, as for {\tt
% plain.bst}.\\
% |\bibitem{key}...|
% \item[cite] special for listing entire databases; the cite key is used
% as the label so it may be listed.\\
% |\bibitem[key]{key}...|
% \item[ay] for author--year style of citations. Various forms of |\bibitem|
% are provided under this option, to support different types
% of \LaTeX{} styles for interfacing with the author--year system.
% \item[alph] for \texttt{alpha.bst} style of citations; essentially numerical
% but an abbreviation of the author names plus year is used as
% the label. First three letters of single author, or first letters
% of first three authors.
% \item[alf-1] with \texttt{alph}, uses first three letters of first author's
% name, regardless of how many authors.
% \item[alf-f] with \texttt{alph}, uses first author's whole name.
% \end{opt}
%
% For numerical style, one can select the HTML option, to output a
% hypertext file instead of a \LaTeX\ one.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] normal \LaTeX\ output;
% \item[html] for HTML output, one reference per paragraph
% \item[htlist] (with \texttt{html}) outputs to a numbered list;
% \item[htdes] (with \texttt{html}) outputs description list, with the key.
% \end{opt}
%
% If \texttt{ay} has been selected, then the type of author--year interface
% is selectable. Some of these, like \texttt{natbib} and \texttt{harvard}
% exist in two versions because of updates in these systems.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is the system I invented for my \texttt{natbib.sty}.\\
% |\bibitem[author(year)]{key}...|
% \item[nat] for extended format of \texttt{natbib.sty} version 5.3\\
% |\bibitem[author(year)full author]{key}...|
% \item[alk] for the \texttt{apalike.sty} of Oren Patashnik and related
% systems\\
% |\bibitem[author, year]{key}...|
% \item[har] for the Harvard family of styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}).\\
% |\harvarditem[short]{long}{year}{key}...|
% \item[harnm] for the extended Harvard family, containing some extra commands
% used by \LaTeXe\ version 2.0.3 of \texttt{harvard.sty}
% \item[ast] for astronomy family of styles (with \texttt{astron.sty}).\\
% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{author}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[cay] for the Chicago family of styles (with \texttt{chicago.sty}).\\
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{long}{short}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[nmd] for the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}).\\
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{author}{year}]{key}...|
% \item[cn] for the ``author--date'' group of styles (with {\tt
% authordate1-4.sty})\\
% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{author, }year]{key}...|
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Sequence:} the order in which the references are listed.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is alphabetical by all authors, date, title
% \item[seq-yr] order by year (ascending), authors, title
% \item[seq-yrr] order by year (descending), authors, title
% \item[seq-no] sequence by citation order
% \item[seq-lab] (author--year) by label, date, title (means that Daly
% precedes Daly and Williams, precedes Daly et al.)
% \item[seq-key] (author--year) like \texttt{seq-lab} except that for
% identical authors and year, the cite keyword is used
% instead of the title
% \item[vonx] ignore \emph{von} part of name when ordering (default is
% to consider \emph{von} as part of the whole surname)
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Language selection:} the translations of certain explicit words.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is English, for \textsl{and}, \textsl{chapter},
% \textsl{editor}, etc.;
% \item[babel] replace words with \LaTeX{} commands that are defined
% in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex};
% \item[lang] adds the \texttt{language} field for switching language
% for one reference only by means of the \verb!\setlanguage!
% command in \texttt{babel}.
% \end{opt}
%
% If one of the external language definition files is used, then the name of
% its language should be in the list of active options. Many other language
% names are already included as options in this main file simply for the
% purpose of adding a comment at the start of the \texttt{.bst} file.
%
% The \texttt{language} field is intended to allow the hyphenation patterns
% to be switched temporarily so that titles can be set in the original
% language.
%
% \textbf{Annotation:}
% annotations are added either by means of the \texttt{annote} field, or
% with a \texttt{.tex} file of the same name as the citation key.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] no annotations
% \item[annote] annotations enabled, with \texttt{annote} field.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Presentations:}
% add a non-standard type to handle talks (presentations). This is similar to the
% \texttt{inproceedings} but without \texttt{booktitle} and with the presenting
% author in bold face. This author is specified by the \texttt{key} entry, which
% is that author's position in the author list (1, 2, \dots). The type of presentation
% (oral or poster) is specified by the entry \texttt{type}. The date without year is given
% in \texttt{month}, which must be present.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] no presentations
% \item[pres] include a \texttt{presentation} type
% \item[pres-bf] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in bold face
% \item[pres-it] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in italics
% \item[pres-sc] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in small caps
% \end{opt}
% Without any of the extra font options, the speaker's name is not highlighted.
%
% \textbf{Missing names:}
% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
% entries.
%
% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] year is inserted in the labels when \texttt{key} replaces authors
% \item[keyxyr] year is left blank in this case
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Names formatting:} how initials and surnames are to be combined.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is full names, given names first
% \item[nm-revf] full names, surname first
% \item[nm-init] initials plus surname
% \item[nm-rev] surname plus initials
% \item[nm-rev1] surname plus initials (1st name only) then initials
% plus surname
% \item[nm-revv1] same as \texttt{nm-rev1} but with full names
% \item[nm-rv] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots
% \item[nm-rvvc] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces
% \item[nm-rvv] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces or comma
% \item[nm-rvx] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots or spaces
% \item[nm-rvcx] as \texttt{nm-rvx}, but with comma after surname
% \item[ed-rev] editors' names in collections are reversed the same as authors'
% \item[ed-au] editors are formatted with same routine as authors; this
% is an alias for \texttt{ed-rev}, which is kept only for
% compatibility
% \item[aunm-semi] a semi-colon is placed between author names instead of
% a comma
% \item[aunm-sl] a slash is placed between author names instead of a comma
% \item[nmdash] repeated author/editor names replaced by dash
% \item[nmd-2] with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 2 em dashes
% \item[nmd-3] with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 3 em dashes
% \item[jnrlab] include the junior part of name in citations (normally
% appears only in reference listing)
% \item[jnrlst] with one of the \texttt{nm-rev} type options, puts the
% junior part last, after the (reversed) first name
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number of names in bibliography:} normally all names listed (in reference list)
% \begin{opt}
% \item[nmlm] limit number of names
% \item[x1...x90] (with \texttt{nmlm}) maximum number of names to appear;
% for over 9, give the tens and units separately, as
% \texttt{x20,x5} for 25
% \item[m1...m90] (with \texttt{nmlm}) minimum number before \textsl{et al.}
% written;
% no check for consistency is taken; one \texttt{x} and
% one \texttt{m} number must be given, and {\tt x}$\le${\tt m}
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number of names in citation:} before \textsl{et al.}
%
% The default is to cite one or two names at most, but for three or more, to
% cite only one name with \textsl{et~ al.}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[mcite] to change the default
% \item[mct-1...mct-5] (with \texttt{mcite}) number of names preceding \textsl{et~al.}
% \item[mct-x2...mct-x5] (with \texttt{mcite}) max number of authors without truncating
% \end{opt}
% The default is equivalent to \texttt{mct-1} and \texttt{mct-x2}.
%
% \textbf{Names font:} in the reference list
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is names in normal typeface
% \item[nmft] names are in some special font
% \item[nmfted] editors' names in collections also get special fonts
% \item[nmft-sc] names in small caps
% \item[nmft-it] names in italics
% \item[nmft-bf] names in bold
% \item[nmft-def] names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
% \item[nmand-rm] `and' in normal font, not same as authors'.
% \item[fnm-rm] (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in regular font
% \item[fnm-def] (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in user defined
% font |\bibfnamefont{}|.
% \item[--] first names are in same font as the surnames.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Citation font:} what is written by the |\cite| command
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is no special font
% \item[lab-it] cited names in italics
% \item[lab-sc] cited names in small caps
% \item[lab-bf] cited names in bold face
% \item[lab-def] cited names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
% \item[and-rm] word `and' in cited names in normal font
% \item[xlab-it] extra label (letter after year) in italics
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Block punctuation:} between logical sections (not mutually
% exclusive)
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is period after each logical section, including end
% \item[blk-com] use commas, except at very end (changes \textsl{In} to
% \textsl{in})
% \item[blk-tit] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows titles of
% articles and books
% \item[blk-tita] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows article title
% \item[tit-col] with \texttt{blk-tit} or \texttt{blk-tita}, for colon instead of period
% \item[com-semi] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses semi-colon instead of comma
% \item[com-blank] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses blanks instead of comma
% \item[in-col] puts a colon after \textsl{In} or \textsl{in} for edited works
% \item[in-it] puts word \textsl{in} in italics (may be used with
% \texttt{in-col})
% \item[in-x] suppresses the word \textsl{in} for edited works
% \item[fin-bare] no punctuation at the very end
% \item[au-col] puts a colon after the author/editor block
% \item[blknt] puts period before note
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Date:} if missing
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] Missing date replaced by ???? (author--year)
% \item[blkyear] Missing date left blank, even in label.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Date:} position and enclosure
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is date at end, before notes; for author--year,
% date consists only of year, no month
% \item[dt-jnl] date at end as for default, except for journal articles
% where it follows the journal name as part of specification
% \item[dt-end] date goes after any notes
% \item[dt-beg] date goes after authors' names
% \item[yr-par] date in parentheses ()
% \item[yr-brk] date in brackets []
% \item[yr-com] date preceded by comma and space
% \item[yr-col] date preceded by colon and space
% \item[yr-per] date preceded by period and space
% \item[yr-blk] date preceded by space
% \item[dtrev] date as year month instead of month year
% \item[dtbf] date bold face
% \item[aymth] include month even for author-year
% \item[xmth] suppress month for numerical mode
% \item[yrp-x] suppresses punctuation following month, year when date
% is just after authors
% \item[yrp-col] adds colon and space after date when just after authors
% \item[yrp-semi] adds semi-colon and space after date when just after authors
% \item[yrp-per] adds period and space after date
% \item[yrpp-xsp] removes blank following year punctuation
% \item[note-yr] permits text (like ``in press'') in the \texttt{year} field
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Article in journal:} style of title, volume, pages
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is: Title. \textit{Journal}, vol(num):p1--p2
% \item[injnl] adds word \textsl{in} before journal name, same style as
% for incollections
% \item[volp-sp] as above, but with a space, vol(num):~p1--p2
% \item[volp-semi] semi-colon instead of colon: vol(num);~p1--p2
% \item[volp-com] comma and space instead of colon: vol(num),~p1--p2
% \item[volp-blk] only space instead of colon: vol(num)~p1--p2
% \item[vol-bf] volume in bold
% \item[vol-it] volume in italics
% \item[vol-2bf] volume and number bold
% \item[vnum-x] no number for journals, only volume
% \item[vnum-sp] space between, as vol (num)
% \item[vnum-cm] replace vol(num) with vol, num
% \item[vnum-nr] replace vol(num) with vol, no. num
% \item[vnum-h] replace vol(num) with vol, \#num
% \item[vnum-b] replace vol(num) with vol num
% \item[jdt-v] year in parentheses attached to volume: vol(year) num
% \item[jdt-vs] as above, with space: vol (year) num
% \item[jdt-p] year precedes pages: vol(num), (year) p1--p2
% \item[jdt-pc] as above, with comma: vol(num), (year), p1--p2
% \item[jpg-1] only starting page given
% \item[pgsep-c] page numbers over 10,000 have comma
% \item[pgsep-s] page numbers over 10\,000 have space
% \item[pgsep-p] page numbers over 10.000 have period
% \item[jwdpg] include `page' or `pp' for articles
% \item[jwdvol] include `volume' or `vol' for articles
% \item[jnm-x] no punctuation after journal name
% \item[tit-it] article title in italics
% \item[tit-qq] article title in quotes
% \item[bt-rm] booktitle in upright font, not italic (this will be issued
% with \texttt{btit-rm} normally; separate options allow for
% more control if wanted
% \item[bt-qq] booktitle of incollection and inproceedings in quotes
% \item[qt-s] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) single instead of double quotes
% \item[qt-g] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) guillemets instead of quotes
% \item[qx] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) comma outside quotes
% \item[jtit-x] no article title (applies only to journals and
% collections)
% \item[atit-u] article title capitalized as in entry, default is
% sentence capitalization (first word and words following
% colons)
% \item[jxper] abbreviated journal names have periods removed, as
% `Phys Rev'
% \item[jttl-rm] name of journal not in italics
% \item[pp-last] pages appear at end, before any notes
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Number and series:} for collections and inproceedings
%
% This is a confusing issue. The standard wants to print something like
% ``number 123 in Collected Works'', and issues a warning if there is a number
% without a series. However, for many such works, there is an identification
% number for the collection, such as ESA~SP-123. Giving this as the number
% without a series results in ``number ESA~SP-123'' and a warning. Setting the
% series to this code number produces desired results, but is illogical.
%
% Another problem is that this code number should often should appear just
% before the publisher name,
% whereas the standard places it elsewhere.
%
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default, number must have series, \textsl{number} is printed
% \item[num-xser] default behaviour if both number and series present, but if
% only number is there, it is printed without the word \textsl{number} and
% without a warning
% \item[numser] moves the number/series to just before the publisher/organization
% \item[ser-vol] for a book in a series with volume number, appears as ``\textit{Series-Name}, vol.~23''
% rather than ``vol.~23 of \textit{Series-Name}''
% \item[ser-ed] for incollection, inproceedings, the series and volume appear between
% the booktitle and the editors
% \end{opt}
%
%
% \textbf{Thesis title:} formatted like a book or article
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is like a book title
% \item[thtit-a] titles of PhD and Master theses formatted like articles
% \item[thtit-x] no thesis title
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Technical Report title:} formatted like book or article
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is like an article title
% \item[trtit-b] titles of technical reports formatted like books
% \item[trnum-it] \textsl{technical report} and number italic
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Books:} title font style, pages, and address location
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is italicized
% \item[btit-rm] book title plain
% \item[bkpg-par] pages in books places in parentheses
% \item[bkpg-x] pages in books bare without word \textsl{pages}
% \item[add-pub] publisher's address before name, colon separated
% \item[pub-par] publisher and address in parentheses
% \item[pub-date] publisher with address and date in parentheses
% \item[pub-xc] with \texttt{pub-date}, suppresses comma before date
% \item[pub-xpar] with \texttt{pub-date} to suppress parentheses
% \item[pre-pub] publisher placed before chapter and page information
% \item[pre-edn] edition before publisher
% \item[pg-bk] add number of pages for books and booklets
% \item[pg-pre] with \texttt{pg-bk}, total pages comes before publisher
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Abbreviations:} of various words, default is no abbreviations
% \begin{opt}
% \item[pp] abbreviate \textsl{page(s)} as \textsl{p.} and \textsl{pp.}
% \item[ppx] no word \textsl{page(s)} or abbreviation
% \item[ed] abbreviate \textsl{editor(s)} as \textsl{ed.} and
% \textsl{eds.}
% \item[ednx] abbreviates \textsl{edition} as \textsl{ed.} instead
% of \textsl{edn.}
% \item[abr] abbreviate \textsl{volume}, \textsl{edition},
% \textsl{technical report}, etc.
% \item[mth-bare] months abbreviated without dots
% \item[jabr] abbreviate names of prestored journals
% \item[ord] write edition numbers as 1st, 2nd, instead as words.
% \item[xedn] suppress conversion of editions (for English) to avoid
% overflowing some \btx\ installations
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} book, inbook, or proceedings.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
% \item[edpar] ``in \emph{names} (editors), \emph{title}''
% \item[edparc] ``in \emph{names}, (editors) \emph{title}''
% \item[edparxc] ``in \emph{names} (editors) \emph{title}''
% \item[bkedcap] capitalizes ``Editor''
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} incollection or inproceedings.
% If none of these are selected, they are treated the same as an edited book.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
% \item[edby] ``in \emph{title}, edited by \emph{names}''
% \item[edby-par] ``in \emph{title} (edited by \emph{names})''
% \item[edby-parc] ``in \emph{title}, (edited by \emph{names})''
% \item[edcap] (with \texttt{edby-par}) capitalizes ``Edited by'' or
% ``Editor''
% \item[edbyx] (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
% \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} before the names,
% \item[edbyw] same as \texttt{edbyx} but with word \textsl{editor} only in
% parentheses
% \item[edbyy] (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
% \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} after the names,
% as ``in \emph{title}, \emph{names}, editors''.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{ISBN, ISSN numbers:} include or not
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is no ISBN number, ignore this field,
% \item[isbn] include an ISBN number as optional entry for books, booklets,
% incollections, inproceedings
% \item[issn] include an ISSN number for periodicals
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{URL address:} include or not, and how
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] ignore URL field,
% \item[url] process URL field,
% \item[url-blk] (with \texttt{url}) URL text as regular blocked item,
% \item[url-nt] URL text treated as a note
% \item[url-nl] URL text added as new line below reference (Harvard style)
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{DOI number:} include or not
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is not to include the Digital Object Identifier
% \item[doi] include the DOI number
% \item[agu-doi] place DOI number AGU style, as part of page designation
%
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{REV\TeX\ data fields:} for use with \texttt{revtex.bst}.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] Do not include extra fields for REV\TeX
% \item[revdata] Include fields \texttt{collaboration}, \texttt{eid},
% \texttt{numpages} for REV\TeX.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Eprint field:} used by REV\TeX\ but can be used on its own.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] Do not include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields
% \item[eprint] Include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Reference component tagging:} apply structure to the |\bibitem| contents.
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] no tagging.
% \item[bibinfo] apply tags like |\bibinfo|, and |\eprint| to the fields of data
% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement.
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Emphasis:} defines what `italicized' really means
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] default is |\em| (can switch between |\it|
% and |\rm|
% \item[em-it] use |\it| instead (always italic)
% \item[em-x] no emphasis
% \item[em-ul] underline for emphasis (with or without \texttt{ulem})
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Special punctuation:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[amper] use \& in place of \textsl{and}
% \item[varand] use command |\BIBand| in place of \textsl{and}
% \item[and-xcom] no comma before last \textsl{and} of an author list
% (citations and references)
% \item[and-com] add comma before \textsl{and} even for two authors (in list of
% references)
% \item[and-com-ed] the same as \texttt{and-com} but for editors in
% collections
% \item[xand] no \textsl{and} in an author list (references)
% \item[etal-it] \textsl{et al.} in italics
% \item[etal-rm] \textsl{et al.} in roman even if authors in different font
% \item[etal-xc] no comma before \textit{et al.}
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Font commands:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] use Plain \TeX\ (also \LaTeX~2.09) font commands
% \item[nfss] use |\textbf|, |\textit|, |\emph| in place of |\bf|, |\it|,
% and |\em|; only works then with \LaTeXe
% \end{opt}
%
% \textbf{Plain \TeX\ compatibility:}
% \begin{opt}
% \item[--] use \LaTeXe\ commands for testing, redefining commands
% \item[plntx] use \TeX\ for maximum compatibility
% \end{opt}
%
%
% \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu}
% Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular
% master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file
% to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex}
% with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give
% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
% when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions
% in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here.
%
% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between
% \begin{quote}
% |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ |</!options&!driver&!bblbst>|
% \end{quote}
% in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
% extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the
% \texttt{babelbst.tex} file.
%
% The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and
% \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name
% support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option
% |<!tail>| and the tail with |<!head>|. This roundabout means of doing
% things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with \texttt{.dbj}
% files that were generated for the older \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by
% simply changing the name of the source file as shown in
% Section~\ref{sec:update}. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and
% \texttt{exlang}) options are omitted, as they are in the older
% \texttt{.dbj} files, \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one
% pass. To include external files, two passes are needed, one for each
% part, with the external file(s) coming in between.
%
% Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if
% \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is
% English, which is tested for as |<!babel>|. This too permits the simple
% update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English.
%
% \subsection*{Selecting Language}
% Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and},
% \textsl{editor}, etc.,
% are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on.
% By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but
% other languages are also possible.
%
% The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in
% external files. At this point, we can make use of features in
% \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a
% definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is
% specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are
% two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel).
%
% The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are
% defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}.
%
% If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst}
% cannot support external files.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*options>
\expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax
\mes{^^J******************^^J%
!!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J%
This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J%
You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J%
No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J%
******************}
\let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp
\newif\ifnumerical
\newif\ifmytemp
\mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J%
<<< the various options, see the section on ^^J%
<<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.}
\umes{EXTERNAL FILES:}
\expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax
\mes{^^J**************^^J%
Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J%
Cannot add external file for language definition^^J%
**************}
\umes{No included files.}%
\def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}%
\else
\MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile
\edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext}
\ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi
\umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names
% of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file.
% Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by
% commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later
% parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension.
%
% Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e.,
% it does not check if the file(s) actually exist.
%
% The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the
% list of file names.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\jfile{}
\ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)}
\mytempfalse
\if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi
\ifmytemp
\MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile
\edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext}
\umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}%
\else
\umes{No included files.}%
\fi
\fi%MBswitch
\def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are
% empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and
% \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through
% \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made.
%
% If there is an external definition file, or if an external list of
% journal names, then some extra text must be
% written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is
% explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly
% braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on
% their grouping functionality. This permits unbalances braces to be
% written to the output file.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
\begingroup\MBswitch
\wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta})
\if!\cfile!\else
\wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta})
\fi
\if!\jfile!\else
\let\jxfile\jfile
\loop
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile??
\wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta})
\edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext)
\if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi
\if!\Mtst!
\repeat
\fi
\wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}})
\wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc)
\endgroup
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Ask whether
% explicit English words wanted or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are
% to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT
(if no external language file)}%
{\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly}
\optdef{b}{babel}{Babel}
{(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if!\cfile!\relax\else
\wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Author--year or numerical}
% The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation style
% is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my {\tt
% natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional argument
% containing the short form of the authors, plus year in parentheses.
% E.g.,
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that
% supports an optional full author list too, as
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of
% bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the
% form
% \begin{quote}
% |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\
% | and Williams}{1990}{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\
% | Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty})
% with entries of the form
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
% Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use
% with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form
% \begin{quote}
% |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...|
% \end{quote}
%
% In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a
% \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite
% key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key
% visible.
%
% A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu
% features depend on which system is to be used.
%
% The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options
% \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three
% letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of
% first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first
% three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and
% full name of first author.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX}
\optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface}
\optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors}
\optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors}
\optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)}
\optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytempfalse \else\mytemptrue \fi
\beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT
(if non author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output}
\optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs}
\optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers}
\optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}
\optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later}
\optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations}
\optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty}
\optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty}
\optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty}
\optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty}
\optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty}
\optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty}
\getans
% \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new
% \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years
% to be variable with commands. These features may be added too.
% The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists
% independently of it too.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED
(if Harvard support selected)}
{\if\ans h*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty}
\optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Language switching}
% A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of
% the reference; with \verb!\setlanguge!, the hyphenation patterns are set for
% setting the title in that language.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No language field}{}
\optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Annotations}
% Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed
% out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases.
% The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized}
\optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Presentations}
% Presentations are talks at meetings, oral or poster, that are not otherwise
% published. The author making the presentation is indicated with the \texttt{key}
% entry, which is the speaker's number within the author list. The font used
% to highlight the speaker is either bold or italics, depending on the secondary
% option, otherwise not highlighted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PRESENTATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Do not add presentation type}{for conference talks}
\optdef{p}{pres}{Add presentation, speaker not highlighted}{}
\optdef{b}{pres,pres-bf}{Presentation, speaker bold face}{}
\optdef{i}{pres,pres-it}{Presentaion, speaker italic}{}
\optdef{c}{pres,pres-sc}{Presentaion, speaker in small caps}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references}
% Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is
% alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also
% choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original
% citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is
% also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can
% also be used for numerical listings.
%
% Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only
% makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year
% in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical
% listings.
%
% For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is
% offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}).
%
% For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the
% optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the
% |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first
% author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by
% the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a
% more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some
% journals (like JGR).
%
% One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the
% same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the
% title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the
% letters a, b,
% c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with
% a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is
% to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course
% assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\ans\relax
\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
(if non-author/year and non-alph)}
{\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)}
\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors}
\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
%
\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
\optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}%
{(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)}
\optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above}
\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)}
\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)}
\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
% The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a
% fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these
% honorifics.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART
(if not citation order)}
{\if\ans c\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)}
\optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Formatting author names}
% The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names
% first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in
% the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other
% possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib}
% file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of
% the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with
% reversed initials.
%
% If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor
% names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots''
% or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are
% not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are.
% An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)}
\optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)}
\optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)}
\optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)}
\optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)}
\optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)}
\optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)}
\optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)}
\optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)}
\optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}%
{(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)}
\optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}%
{(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS
(if author names reversed)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}
\if\ans r
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans s
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith}
\fi
\if\ans a
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans x
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith}
\fi
\if\ans f
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
\fi
\if\ans y
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith}
\fi
\if\ans b
\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
\fi
\optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR
(if author names reversed)}
{}
\optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.}
\optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing}
\optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{}
\optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{}
\optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{}
\optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{}
\optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{}
\optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Number of authors}
% Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is
% presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit
% them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author
% names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed.
%
% Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the
% \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex),
% this is done here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing}
\optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans l
\loop
\ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)}
\ifnum\num>99\relax
\mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99}
\repeat
\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors}
\else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
\mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors}
\edef\numx{\num}
\loop
\ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)}
\ifnum\num>\numx
\mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx}
\repeat
\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors}
\else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
\mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Something that I finally add after being asked many times, is to allow for
% more than one name in the citation before inserting \textsl{et~al.}
% to allow more than 2 authors before truncating
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{One author et al}{for three or more authors}
\optdef{m}{mcite}{Some other truncation scheme}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans m\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL:
(if regular cite not selected)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{mct-1}{One et al}{}
\optdef{2}{mct-2}{One, Two et al}{}
\optdef{3}{mct-3}{One, Two, Three et al}{}
\optdef{4}{mct-4}{One, Two, Three, Four et al}{}
\optdef{5}{mct-5}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL:
(if regular cite not selected)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{mct-x2}{Two authors without truncating}{}
\optdef{3}{mct-x3}{Three authors}{without truncating}
\optdef{4}{mct-x4}{Four authors}{without truncating}
\optdef{5}{mct-x5}{Five authors}{without truncating}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Typeface of names}
% The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current
% typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics.
%
% Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the
% regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be
% in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic.
%
% Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|,
% which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does
% not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first
% names, to be user-defined.
%
% Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these
% fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{}
\optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)}
\optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)}
\optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)}
\optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES
(if non-default font for authors)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{}
\optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{}
\optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{}
\optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)}
\optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Names in Citation label}
% This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written
% by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like
% `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the
% extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain.
%
% This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references
% except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames
% are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also
% be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there
% will be no default definition for it.
%
% If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be
% optionally put in the normal font.
%
% It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since
% this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the
% author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a
% number of private style files for achieving this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command}
\optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{}
\optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{}
\optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{}
\optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)}
\getans
\mytempfalse
\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS
(if non-default font for citation lables)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{}
\optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL
(The extra letter on the year)}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{}
\optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Label for missing author names}
%
% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
% entries.
%
% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if
% \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces
% (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like
% |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would
% get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on
% a blank year.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)}
\optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Missing date}
% A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case,
% \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year
% punctuation or brackets.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text}
\optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Position of date}
% This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date
% immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year)
% are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the
% end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place
% it even after the notes.
%
% Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal
% specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at
% the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{}
\optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{}
\optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end}
\optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Format of date}
% The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a
% colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears.
% For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month,
% but this may be overridden.
%
% If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special
% punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is
% probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses.
%
% The date can even be put into bold face.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
(if non author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets}
\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)}
\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]}
\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'}
\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'}
\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'}
\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{}
\optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
(if including month)}
{\if\ans x\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets}
\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)}
\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]}
\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'}
\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'}
\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'}
\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month}
\optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
(if including month)}
{\if\ans m*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION
(if date not at end)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)}
\optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:}
\optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;}
\optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas}
\optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation}
\optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{}
\optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated
% to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some
% users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so
% that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.''
% Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually,
% I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR
(if author-year citations)}
{\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'}
\optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Article title in journal}
% The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or
% conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single
% or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a
% poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases.
%
% Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first
% word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file
% entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it
% should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always
% capitalized in braces. Example:
% \begin{quote}
% |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"|
% \end{quote}
% which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The
% Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option.
%
% Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font}
\optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)}
\optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)}
\optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)}
\optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<<Title,>> ..)}
\optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)}
\optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)}
\optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<<Title>>, ..)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES
(if quoted title)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too}
\optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)}
\optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings}
\optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Journal names}
% Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be
% removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are
% retained.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'}
\optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{}
\optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports}
% The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same
% as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of
% an article.
%
% The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that
% of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{}
\optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{}
\optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{}
\optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'}
\optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}%
{as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Journal reference}
% Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be
% formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits.
% The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume
% start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound
% together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages
% continuously through the whole volume.
%
% I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each
% `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation.
% I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I
% now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must
% contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at
% version 3.84.
%
% A number of styles for journal specifications are
% \begin{quote}
% \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
% 21(2):33--55 & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\
% \textbf{21}(2):33--55 & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\
% \textit{21}(2), 33--55 & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\
% 21(2) (1995) 33--55 & 21(1995), 33-55\\
% 21(2) 33--55 & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55
% \end{tabular}
% \end{quote}
%
% Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the
% start page is wanted.
%
% It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification,
% in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space
% to the volume, or preceding the pages.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)}
\optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)}
\optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)}
\optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.',
% with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used
% with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)}
\optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)}
\optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2}
\optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2}
\optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2}
\optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2}
\optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp}
\optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp}
\optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp}
\optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp}
\optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position}
\optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)}
\optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)}
\optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387}
\optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given}
\optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{}
\optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234}
\optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234}
\optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256}
\optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as
% well as for journals.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal}
\optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21}
\optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and
% inproceedings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"}
\optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX}
\optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX}
\optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{}
\optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be
% separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name}
\optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Books}
% The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is
% normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font.
%
% The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350).
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)}
\optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55}
\optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)}
\optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{}
\optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.}
\optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding
% the name, separated by colon, as
% \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote}
%
% Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date,
% as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in
% parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of
% parentheses.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York}
\optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses}
\optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{}
\optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)}
\optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)}
\optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994}
\optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{}
\optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{}
\optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers}
% Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an
% optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet},
% \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}.
% However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when
% there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number.
%
% Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or
% course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since
% they are sometimes printed in a periodical.
%
% Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more
% robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded.
% The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the
% page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number
% where the pages would normally appear.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.}
\optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals}
\optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{}
\optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"}
\optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number}
\optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Editor of book without author}
%
% This is normally
% \begin{quote}
% J. K. James, editor
% \end{quote}
% but may also be
% \begin{quote}
% J. K. James, (editor)\\
% J. K. James (editor),
% \end{quote}
% Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or
% abbreviated.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{}
\optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after}
\optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case}
\optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between}
\optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
\optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas}
\optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Edited by}
% For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is
% \begin{quote}
% In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots
% \end{quote}
% Alternative forms are
% \begin{quote}
% In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\
% In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\
% In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots
% \end{quote}
% If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is
% used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)}
\optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)}
\optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{}
\optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{}
\optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{}
\optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{}
\optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{}
\optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{}
\optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{}
\optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY'
(if editor capitalizable)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case}
\optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Block punctuation}
% Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the
% author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally
% separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another
% choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given.
%
% \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks
% are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only
% function when the default option here is taken, for then the command
% |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally
% defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line
% when open bibliographies are wanted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{}
\optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks}
{(periods or new lines with openbib option)}
\optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{}
\optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{}
\optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{}
\optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
\optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
\optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas}
\optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\mytempfalse
\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi
\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES
(if not using \string\newblock)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks}
\optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation}
\optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon}
% When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing
% that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings}
\optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')}
\optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space}
\optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{}
\optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES
(if using 'in' with collections)}
{\if\ans x\else*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{}
\optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Final punctuation}
% The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This
% may be suppressed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference}
\optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Abbreviations}
% A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter,
% and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the
% rest with a single option.
%
% Additionally, the edition numbers may be
% output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.).
% (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English
% words.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'
(if not using external language file)}
{\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
(if abbreviating words)}
{\if\ans a*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
\getans
\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal
% languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language
% definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made
% in the external file, which is read in at this point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}%
\if!\cfile!\relax\else
\input\cfile
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in
% the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal
% names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr}
% or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option
% menus from the journal-name files will be read in.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals}
\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{}
\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}}
% It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to
% specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two
% names.
%
% A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand|
% in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the
% document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations
% where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in
% textual ones.)
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists}
\optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'}
\optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'}
\optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'}
\optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS
(if using comma before `and' with authors)}
{\if\ans c*\fi}%
\optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections}
\optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list}
\optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list}
\optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}}
% One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics.
% Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the
% \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{}
\optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{}
\optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the revdata option group}
% The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support
% with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of
% \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a
% reference.
% \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos
% or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the
% online article. The output is\\
% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|
% \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\
% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\
% The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is
% translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition
% of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec}
% as a URL.
% \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned
% into a hyperlink.
% \end{itemize}
%
% A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two
% appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected
% independently of this option.
%
% In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that
% no longer use page numbers.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier.
% \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in
% conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are
% desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev.
%
% The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be
% included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields.
%
% The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for
% the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the
% page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed
% volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number.
%
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX}
\optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields}
{collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url}
\getans
\mytemptrue
\if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi
\beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD:
(without REVTeX fields)}
{\ifmytemp*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{}
\optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{URL address}
% For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry.
% Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles.
% The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url}
% package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command
% to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise,
% \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded
% by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the
% user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included.
%
% Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the
% offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS:
(without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi}
\optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents}
\optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block}
\optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{}
\optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the bibinfo option group}
% If reference component tagging is enabled, we
% apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data
% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that
% these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography|
% environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the
% tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag
% information to separate authors from title, for example.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{}
\optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags}
{in the \string\bibitem\space entries}
\optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags}
{like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Define emphasis}
% In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be
% understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the
% command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always
% italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and
% |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or
% to switch off italics altogether.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS:
(affects all so-called italics)}{}
\optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching}
\optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics}
\optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all}
\optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
% Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands,
% which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with
% Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands
% that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax.
%
% If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX,
% do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{}
\optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX}
\optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing}
\getans
\endoptiongroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called,
% then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
\begingroup\MBswitch
\wr(,{\pc)
\endgroup
\fi
\endoptions
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
%
% \section{The Bibliographic Coding}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>
%<*!tail>
% For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
%-------------------------------------------------------------------
%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
% WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
% The input dbj file contains one of the options
%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def
%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def
% without the corresponding general option(s):
%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft
%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab
% (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs)
% Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess.
%
%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
%<*!exlang>
%<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
%<*babel>
% This bibliography style file requires a file named babelbst.tex
% containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc.
%</babel>
%</!exlang>
%<*exlang>
% This bibliography style file is intended for texts in
%<bahasa> % BAHASA
%<brazilian> % BRAZILIAN
%<catalan> % CATALAN
%<croatian> % CROATIAN
%<czech> % CZECH
%<danish> % DANISH
%<dansk> % DANSK
%<dutch> % DUTCH
%<english> % ENGLISH
%<esperanto> % ESPERANTO
%<finnish> % FINNISH
%<french> % FRENCH
%<galacian> % GALACIAN
%<german> % GERMAN
%<hungarian> % HUNGARIAN
%<italian> % ITALIAN
%<norwegian> % NORWEGIAN
%<norsk> % NORWEGIAN
%<polski> % POLISH
%<polish> % POLISH
%<portuguese> % PORTUGUESE
%<romanian> % ROMANIAN
%<russian> % RUSSIAN
%<slovak> % SLOVAK
%<slovenian> % SLOVENIAN
%<slovene> % SLOVENIAN
%<spanish> % SPANISH
%<swedish> % SWEDISH
%<turkish> % TURKISH
%</exlang>
%<*!html>
%<*ay>
% This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
% non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
% Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
%<*alk>
% or: apalike.sty by Oren Patashnik
% The form of the \bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}...
%</alk>
%<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
% The form of the \bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
%<nat> % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
% The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
% of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
% in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
% parenthesis!
%<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
% In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
% really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
% be parentheses in the label.
% The \cite command functions as follows:
% \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
%<nat> % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
% \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
%<nat> % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
% \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
% \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
% \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
% \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
%<nat> % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
% \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
%</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
%<*har>
% or: harvard.sty by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier
%<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3 or harvard v2.0.3)
% The form of the bibitem entries is
% \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}...
%</har>
%<*cay>
% or: chicago.sty
% The form of the bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith}
% {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}...
%</cay>
%<*nmd>
% or: named.sty
% The form of the bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
%</nmd>
%<*ast>
% or: astron.sty
% The form of the bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
%</ast>
%<*cn>
% or: authordate1-4.sty
% The form of the bibitem entries is
% \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}...
%</cn>
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
%<*!alph&!cite>
% This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX.
%</!alph&!cite>
%<*alph>
% This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst,
% where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89.
%</alph>
%<*cite&!alph>
% This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be
% used to list all the entries in a bib database
%</cite&!alph>
% It requires no extra package to interface to the main text.
% The form of the \bibitem entries is
%<!alph&!cite> % \bibitem{key}...
%<alph> % \bibitem[label]{key}...
%<!alph&cite> % \bibitem[key]{key}...
%<*!cite|alph>
% Usage of \cite is as follows:
%<*!alph&!cite>
% \cite{key} ==>> [#]
% \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2]
% where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list.
%</!alph&!cite>
%<*alph>
% \cite{key} ==>> [label]
% \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2]
% The order in the reference list is by label.
%</alph>
%<*seq-no&!alph>
% The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally
% cited in the text, or that in the database.
%</seq-no&!alph>
%<*!seq-no&!alph>
% The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors.
%</!seq-no&!alph>
%</!cite|alph>
%</!ay>
%</!html>
%<*html>
% This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX.
% The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output
% (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged,
% and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need
% to be revised.
%
%<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list.
%<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed
%<htdes> % before each entry.
%<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph.
%</html>
%---------------------------------------------------------------------
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add URL entry type for \texttt{harnm} option}
% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or
% rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it
% here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}.
%
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add optional entries \texttt{isbn}}
% Books normally have an ISBN number.
% This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in
% \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the \texttt{revdata} data}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
ENTRY
{ address
%<annote> annote
%<eprint> archive
author
booktitle
chapter
%<revdata> collaboration
%<doi> doi
edition
editor
eid
%<eprint> eprint
howpublished
institution
%<isbn> isbn
%<issn> issn
journal
key
%<lang> language
month
note
number
%<revdata> numpages
organization
pages
publisher
school
series
title
type
%<url|harnm|revdata> url
volume
year
}
{}
%<!ay&!alph> { label }
%<!ay&alph> { label extra.label sort.label }
%<ay> { label extra.label sort.label short.list }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
{ #0 'before.all :=
#1 'mid.sentence :=
#2 'after.sentence :=
#3 'after.block :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist
% past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate
% between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully.
% \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { s t}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
{ 's :=
output.state mid.sentence =
%<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)> { ", " * write$ }
%<blk-com&com-semi> { "; " * write$ }
%<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank> { " " * write$ }
{ output.state after.block =
{ add.period$ write$
newline$
%<!html> "\newblock " write$
}
{ output.state before.all =
'write$
{ add.period$ " " * write$ }
if$
}
if$
mid.sentence 'output.state :=
}
if$
s
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output}
{ duplicate$ empty$
'pop$
'output.nonnull
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.check'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.check}
{ 't :=
duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
'output.nonnull
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add annotation}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: make ``babel compatible''}
% I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is
% from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or
% uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {fin.entry}
%<*!fin-bare>
{ add.period$
write$
%</!fin-bare>
%<*fin-bare>
{ duplicate$ empty$
'pop$
'write$
if$
%</fin-bare>
%<html&htdes> "</dd>" write$
%<html&!htdes&htlist> "</li>" write$
%<html&!htdes&!htlist> "</p>" write$
newline$
%<*annote>
%<*!html>
annote missing$
{ "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
{ "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$
}
if$
%</!html>
%<*html>
"<blockquote><strong>Key:</strong> "
cite$ * write$
annote missing$
{ newline$ }
{ "<br><strong>Annotation:</strong>" write$ newline$
annote write$ newline$
}
if$
"</blockquote>" write$ newline$
%</html>
%</annote>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.block}
{ output.state before.all =
'skip$
{ after.block 'output.state := }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.sentence}
{ output.state after.block =
'skip$
{ output.state before.all =
'skip$
{ after.sentence 'output.state := }
if$
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`add.blank'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 10}{Add function}
% When text is printed with \texttt{output} or
% \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that
% a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to
% suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the
% \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no
% punctuation is to be inserted.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {add.blank}
{ " " * before.all 'output.state :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`add.colon'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add macro}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Simplify: just tack on colon}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*au-col|tit-col>
FUNCTION {add.colon}
{ duplicate$ empty$
'skip$
{ ":" * add.blank }
if$
}
%</au-col|tit-col>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add function}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 30}{Present only for option \texttt{yrpp-xsp}}
% Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace|
% permits a line break at this point.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*yrpp-xsp>
FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
%<*!html>
{ "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state :=
}
%</!html>
%<html>{ before.all 'output.state := }
%</yrpp-xsp>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`date.block'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 9}{Add function}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Add option \texttt{yrp-per}}
% The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects
% after the date.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {date.block}
{
%<*!yrp-x>
%<yrp-col> ":" *
%<*!yrp-col>
%<yrp-semi> ";" *
%<*!yrp-semi>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per> skip$
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per> new.sentence
%</!yrp-semi>
%</!yrp-col>
%</!yrp-x>
%<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
%<!yrpp-xsp> add.blank
%<yrpp-xsp> no.blank.or.punct
%</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`not'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {not}
{ { #0 }
{ #1 }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`and'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {and}
{ 'skip$
{ pop$ #0 }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`or'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {or}
{ { pop$ #1 }
'skip$
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`non.stop'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 8}{Add to test if last character
% is punctuation: . ! ?}
% This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string
% on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to
% be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
FUNCTION {non.stop}
{ duplicate$
"}" * add.period$
#-1 #1 substring$ "." =
}
%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Add macro}
% This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used
% for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously
% \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just
% dots.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
STRINGS {z}
FUNCTION {remove.dots}
{ 'z :=
""
{ z empty$ not }
{ z #1 #1 substring$
z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
{ * }
if$
}
while$
}
%</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.block.checka}
{ empty$
'skip$
'new.block
if$
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
{ empty$
swap$ empty$
and
'skip$
'new.block
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka}
{ empty$
'skip$
'new.sentence
if$
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb}
{ empty$
swap$ empty$
and
'skip$
'new.sentence
if$
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {field.or.null}
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
'skip$
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`emphasize'}
% Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command
% may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations.
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
%\changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Add \texttt{em-ul} option}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {emphasize}
%<*!em-x>
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<html> { "<i>" swap$ * "</i>" * }
%<*!html>
%<em-ul> { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<*!em-ul>
%<*!nfss>
%<!em-it> { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * }
%<em-it> { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * }
%</!nfss>
%<*nfss>
%<!em-it> { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<em-it> { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</nfss>
%</!em-ul>
%</!html>
if$
}
%</!em-x>
%<em-x>{ skip$ }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bolden'}
% The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration.
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
FUNCTION {bolden}
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<html> { "<b>" swap$ * "</b>" * }
%<*!html>
%<!nfss> { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * }
%<nfss> { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</!html>
if$
}
%</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`scaps'}
% To put text into small caps.
%\changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add function}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
FUNCTION {scaps}
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<html> { skip$ }
%<*!html>
%<!nfss> { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * }
%<nfss> { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * }
%</!html>
if$
}
%</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`roman.list'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add function}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
% \begin{macro}{`roman.cite'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Add function}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
% Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the
% surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names
% (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is
% deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names.
%
% For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear.
%
% It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the
% user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|,
% and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands
% are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given.
%
% If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names
% are formatted the same as the surnames.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft>
FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
%<nmft-it>{ emphasize }
%<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden }
%<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps }
%<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<!html> { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html> { skip$ }
if$
}
%</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
%<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font }
%<fnm-rm>{ skip$ }
%<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<!html> { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html> { skip$ }
if$
}
%</!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
%</nmft>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*lab>
FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
%<lab-it>{ emphasize }
%<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden }
%<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps }
%<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
{ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "" }
%<!html> { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
%<html> { skip$ }
if$
}
%</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
%</lab>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: replace \texttt{tie.or.space.connect} with
% more flexible function}
% The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether
% the top item on the stack requires a tie character and
% slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it.
% At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to
% the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found
% just ahead of it on the stack.
%
% The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom
% for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space
% depending on the length of the top object.
%
% Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch,
% and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
{ "~" }
{ " " }
if$
swap$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`capitalize'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 7}{Add capitalizing function}
% Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel},
% some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and
% |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {capitalize}
%<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }
%<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`space.word'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to space out words; necessary
% for the multilingual functions.}
% The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or
% words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$
% functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit
% text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to
% define the word functions to be without spacing.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {space.word}
{ " " swap$ * " " * }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
% Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!exlang>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Replace all explicit words with functions
% of the form \texttt{bbl.xxx}.}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 15}{Add option \texttt{varand}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ednx}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Jun 9}{Make \texttt{\char`\\BIBand} protected}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add \texttt{bbl.eidpp}}
% These are the default English words. There is no default language
% option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!babel>
% The language selected here is ENGLISH
FUNCTION {bbl.and}
%<!varand|html>{ "and"}
%<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"}
FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
{ "et~al." }
FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
%<!ed>{ "editors" }
%<ed>{ "eds." }
FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
%<!ed>{ "editor" }
%<ed>{ "ed." }
FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
{ "edited by" }
FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
%<!abr>{ "edition" }
%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }
FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
%<!abr>{ "volume" }
%<abr>{ "vol." }
FUNCTION {bbl.of}
{ "of" }
FUNCTION {bbl.number}
%<!abr>{ "number" }
%<abr>{ "no." }
FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
{ "no." }
FUNCTION {bbl.in}
{ "in" }
FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
%<pp>{ "pp." }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
FUNCTION {bbl.page}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
%<pp>{ "p." }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
%<*revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
{ "pages" }
%</revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
%<abr>{ "chap." }
FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }
FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
{ "Master's thesis" }
FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {bbl.first}
%<!ord>{ "First" }
%<ord>{ "1st" }
FUNCTION {bbl.second}
%<!ord>{ "Second" }
%<ord>{ "2nd" }
FUNCTION {bbl.third}
%<!ord>{ "Third" }
%<ord>{ "3rd" }
FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
%<ord>{ "4th" }
FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
%<ord>{ "5th" }
FUNCTION {bbl.st}
{ "st" }
FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
{ "nd" }
FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
{ "rd" }
FUNCTION {bbl.th}
{ "th" }
%</!xedn>
%<*!abr>
MACRO {jan} {"January"}
MACRO {feb} {"February"}
MACRO {mar} {"March"}
MACRO {apr} {"April"}
MACRO {may} {"May"}
MACRO {jun} {"June"}
MACRO {jul} {"July"}
MACRO {aug} {"August"}
MACRO {sep} {"September"}
MACRO {oct} {"October"}
MACRO {nov} {"November"}
MACRO {dec} {"December"}
%</!abr>
%<*abr>
MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
MACRO {may} {"May"}
MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
%</abr>
%</!babel>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit
% translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be
% defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic
% language selection.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*babel>
% The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex.
FUNCTION {bbl.and}
{ "\bbland{}"}
FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
{ "\bbletal{}"}
FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
%<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" }
%<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
%<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" }
%<ed>{ "\bbled{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
{ "\bbledby{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
%<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
%<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.of}
{ "\bblof{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.number}
%<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblno{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
{ "\bblno{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.in}
{ "\bblin{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" }
%<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
FUNCTION {bbl.page}
%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" }
%<pp>{ "\bblp{}" }
%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
%<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
%<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" }
%<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
{ "\bblmthesis{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
{ "\bblphdthesis{}" }
%<*revdata>
FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
{ "\bbleidpp{}" }
%</revdata>
%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {bbl.first}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.second}
%<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.third}
%<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
%<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" }
%<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.st}
{ "\bblst{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
{ "\bblnd{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
{ "\bblrd{}" }
FUNCTION {bbl.th}
{ "\bblth{}" }
%</!xedn>
MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"}
MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"}
MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"}
MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"}
MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"}
MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"}
MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"}
MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"}
MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"}
MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"}
MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"}
MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"}
%</babel>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to format English ordinals.}
% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
% languages.
%
% This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes
% English. This means that the language definition files must also provide
% for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
FUNCTION {eng.ord}
{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
#-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
{ bbl.th * }
{ duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
duplicate$ "1" =
{ pop$ bbl.st * }
{ duplicate$ "2" =
{ pop$ bbl.nd * }
{ "3" =
{ bbl.rd * }
{ bbl.th * }
if$
}
if$
}
if$
}
if$
}
%</(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!exlang>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!tail>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!head>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!jabr>
MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
MACRO {ieeetcad}
{"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
%</!jabr>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise journal abbreviations}
% Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik
% ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*jabr>
MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
MACRO {ieeetcad}
{"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
%</jabr>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO:
% add functions \texttt{bibinfo.check}, \texttt{bibinfo.warn},
% and \texttt{format.eprint}}
% Define functions that encapsulate the argument
% in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the
% bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer
% program to parse the |\bibitem| contents.
%
% The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries
% is accessed for output; these are the points where
% the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions
% are called.
% \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[ \texttt{author} ]\texttt{format.names}
% \item[ \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors}
% \item[ \texttt{doi} ]\texttt{format.doi}
% \item[ \texttt{editor} ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle})
% \item[ \texttt{eid} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages}
% \item[ \texttt{isbn} ]\texttt{format.isbn}
% \item[ \texttt{issn} ]\texttt{format.issn}
% \item[ \texttt{journal} ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article
% \item[ \texttt{numpages} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid}
% \item[ \texttt{organization} ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual}
% \item[ \texttt{pages} ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings})
% \item[ \texttt{publisher} ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings})
% \item[ \texttt{title} ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order}
% \item[ \texttt{volume} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
% \item[ \texttt{year} ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub}
% \item[ \texttt{booktitle} ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
% \item[ \texttt{howpublished} ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc}
% \item[ \texttt{edition} ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition}
% \item[ \texttt{institution} ]\texttt{techreport}
% \item[ \texttt{school} ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}
% \item[ \texttt{address} ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport}
% \item[ \texttt{chapter} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}
% \item[ \texttt{number} ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
% \item[ \texttt{series} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
% \item[ \texttt{type} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
% \item[ \texttt{month} ]\texttt{format.date}
% \item[ \texttt{note} ]\texttt{format.note}
% \item[ \texttt{annote} ]\texttt{fin.entry}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[ \texttt{url} ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url})
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}}
% \begin{description}
% \item[ \texttt{eprint} ]\texttt{format.eprint}
% \item[ \texttt{archive} ]\texttt{format.eprint}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:}
% \begin{description}
% \item[ \texttt{key} ]cite key
% \item[ \texttt{language} ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage}
% \end{description}
%
% \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field}
% \begin{description}
% \item[ \texttt{date} ]\texttt{format.date}
% \end{description}
%
% Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$}
% and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving
% a warning if either is the case.
%
% If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|.
% The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option:
% if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object.
%
% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
%
% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
% Side effect: warning.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
{ swap$
duplicate$ missing$
{
%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
%<!bibinfo.warning> pop$ pop$
""
}
{ duplicate$ empty$
{
%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
%<!bibinfo.warning> swap$ pop$
}
{ swap$
%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
%<!bibinfo> pop$
}
if$
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'}
% Replaces \texttt{output.check}
% with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}.
%
% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
%
% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
%
% Side effect: warning if the field is empty.
% Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect,
% then no encapsulation is done.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
{ swap$
duplicate$ missing$
{
swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
""
}
{ duplicate$ empty$
{
swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
}
{ swap$
%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
%<!bibinfo> pop$
}
if$
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'}
% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{Add optional archive field}
% The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field.
%
% If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function
% encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|.
%
% \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*eprint>
FUNCTION {format.eprint}
{ eprint duplicate$ empty$
'skip$
{ "\eprint"
archive empty$
'skip$
{ "[" * archive * "]" * }
if$
"{" * swap$ * "}" *
}
if$
}
%</eprint>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`write.url'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{write.url} for option
% \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Apply to non-Harvard styles}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Fix bug when both harnm and url-nl given}
% This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard}
% bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line
% after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly
% differently.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
FUNCTION {write.url}
%<*!html>
{ url empty$
{ skip$ }
%<harnm> { "\newline\harvardurl{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
%<!harnm&url-nl> { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
if$
}
%</!html>
%<*html>
{ url empty$
{ skip$ }
{ "<br><a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
* ">" * url * "</a>" * write$ newline$ }
if$
}
%</html>
%</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.url'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 22}{Add function for regular URLs}
% A non-harvard version of URL is also made for regular styles.
% This is used only if the URL text is added as a regular item to the
% reference information, blocked if necessary. Alternatives are on a new line
% (Harvard-like) or in the note.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
FUNCTION {format.url}
{ url empty$
{ "" }
%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * }
%<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
%<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * }
if$
}
%</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'}
% \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{Add \texttt{presentation}, which needs this function
% to highlight speaker name}
% The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which
% author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's
% name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font
% is specified, all names are the same.
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
FUNCTION {check.speaker}
{ key empty$ 'skip$
{ key nameptr int.to.str$ =
{
%<pres-bf> bolden
%<pres-it&!pres-bf> emphasize
%<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf> scaps
}
'skip$
if$
}
if$
}
%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{`format.names'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} command for `and' with
% new option \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Add option \texttt{nm-revf}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvx}}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvv}}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Jr to go at end with \texttt{nm-rev1} (AGU style)}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Add option \texttt{nmand-rm}}
% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Add option \texttt{etal-rm}}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{aunm-semi}}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add option \texttt{nm-revv1} (AGU style with full
% names)}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{aunm-sl}}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
% from last format function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate author name for later processing;
% trap empty author list;
% bring common braces to outer level for easier understanding of code.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Add option \texttt{jnrlst} to put Jr. last}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}}
% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{etal-xc}}
% The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses
% |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed
% at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which
% need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option.
% This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from
% this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means
% if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand|
% in the document for the language being used.
%
% The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior
% to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as
% Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the
% AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a
% good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an
% option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older
% versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new
% feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst}
% files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first
% name.
%
% |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the
% names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called
% for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack
% just before the call.
% \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { bibinfo}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
% one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
%
% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.names}
{ 'bibinfo :=
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
's :=
"" 't :=
#1 'nameptr :=
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames 'namesleft :=
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ s nameptr
% \end{macrocode}
% Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special
% font, or when the entire name set in a single special font.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<nm-init> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-init>
%<nm-rev&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}"
%<nm-rev&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rev>
%<nm-rv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}"
%<nm-rv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rv>
%<nm-rvx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}"
%<nm-rvx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}"
%<nm-rvcx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<nm-rvv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}"
%<nm-rvv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvv>
%<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}"
%<nm-rvvc&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-rvvc>
%<nm-revf&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}"
%<nm-revf&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-revf>
"{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%</!nm-revf>
%</!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-rev>
%</!nm-init>
%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rev1>
duplicate$ #1 >
{ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" }
%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" }
if$
%</nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
duplicate$ #1 >
{ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" }
if$
%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvx> remove.dots
%<nmft&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
%</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
% \end{macrocode}
% Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are
% set in (possibly different) special fonts.
%
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Junior part always in first name font}
% The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-init>
"{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-init>
%<*!nm-init>
%<*nm-rev>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}"
%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rev>
%<*!nm-rev>
%<*nm-rv>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{~}}"
%<jnrlst> "{f{~}}{ jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rv>
%<*!nm-rv>
%<*nm-rvx>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{}}"
%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{ jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvx>
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<*nm-rvcx>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{}}"
%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvcx>
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<*nm-rvv>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{.}.}"
%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{ jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvv>
%<*!nm-rvv>
%<*nm-rvvc>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{.}.}"
%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvvc>
%<*!nm-rvvc>
%<*nm-revf>
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}"
%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-revf>
%<*!nm-revf>
"{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</!nm-revf>
%</!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-rev>
%</!nm-init>
%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rev1>
nameptr #1 >
{ "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
}
{ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}"
%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
}
if$
%</nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
nameptr #1 >
{ "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
}
{ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
s nameptr
%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}"
%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}"
format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
}
if$
%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
*
%</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
bibinfo bibinfo.check
%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
type$ "presentation" =
{ check.speaker }
'skip$
if$
%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
't :=
nameptr #1 >
{
%<*nmlm>
%<m1> nameptr #1
%<m2> nameptr #2
%<m3> nameptr #3
%<m4> nameptr #4
%<m5> nameptr #5
%<m6> nameptr #6
%<m7> nameptr #7
%<m8> nameptr #8
%<m9> nameptr #9
%<m0> nameptr #0
%<m10> #10 +
%<m20> #20 +
%<m30> #30 +
%<m40> #40 +
%<m50> #50 +
%<m60> #60 +
%<m70> #70 +
%<m80> #80 +
%<m90> #90 +
#1 + =
%<x1> numnames #1
%<x2> numnames #2
%<x3> numnames #3
%<x4> numnames #4
%<x5> numnames #5
%<x6> numnames #6
%<x7> numnames #7
%<x8> numnames #8
%<x9> numnames #9
%<x0> numnames #0
%<x10> #10 +
%<x20> #20 +
%<x30> #30 +
%<x40> #40 +
%<x50> #50 +
%<x60> #60 +
%<x70> #70 +
%<x80> #80 +
%<x90> #90 +
> and
{ "others" 't :=
#1 'namesleft := }
'skip$
if$
%</nmlm>
namesleft #1 >
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * }
%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * }
{
s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
{ 't := }
{ pop$ }
if$
%<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," *
%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" *
%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" *
%<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
numnames #2 >
%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * }
%<aunm-semi> { ";" * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * }
'skip$
if$
%</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
t "others" =
{
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
%<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
}
%<*!xand>
{
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper> bbl.and
%<amper> "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
%<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font
space.word * t *
}
%</!xand>
%<xand> { " " * t * }
if$
}
if$
}
't
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
%<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ bib.name.font }
if$
%</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
} if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add option \texttt{ed-rev} to allow editor
% to be formatted just like authors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{and-com-ed} to replace
% \texttt{and-com} for collection editors}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ed-au}, synonomous with
% \texttt{ed-rev}}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Mar 18}{Bug fix: \texttt{and-com-ed} used correctly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editor for later processing;
% trap empty editor list}
% When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the
% names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections,
% where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is
% normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option
% \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly
% like those of authors, being reversed if necessary.
%
% The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more
% logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like
% authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is
% selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save
% programming memory.
%
% The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default
% when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore
% it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default,
% has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it.
%
% The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or
% slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not
% selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors
% are to be formatted the same.
%
% This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code
% which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first
% followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed;
% and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}.
%
% Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
% with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
%
% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
{
%<ed-rev|ed-au> format.names
%<*!ed-rev&!ed-au>
'bibinfo :=
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
's :=
"" 't :=
#1 'nameptr :=
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames 'namesleft :=
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ s nameptr
% \end{macrocode}
% Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
%<nm-revv1> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%<*!nm-revv1>
%<nm-rv> "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rv>
%<nm-rvx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvx>
%<nm-rvcx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvcx>
%<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
"{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
%</!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rvx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-revv1>
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> remove.dots
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
%</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
% \end{macrocode}
% Editor first and last name handled separately.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
"{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
%<*nm-revv1>
"{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-revv1>
%<*!nm-revv1>
%<*nm-rv>
"{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rv>
%<*!nm-rv>
%<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
"{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
%<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
%<*nm-rvv>
"{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
if$
%</nm-rvv>
%<*!nm-rvv>
"{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
if$
s nameptr
"{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
s nameptr
"{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
if$
%</!nm-rvv>
%</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
%</!nm-rv>
%</!nm-revv1>
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
*
%</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
bibinfo bibinfo.check
't :=
nameptr #1 >
{
namesleft #1 >
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * }
%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * }
{
s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
{ 't := }
{ pop$ }
if$
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," *
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" *
%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" *
%<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
numnames #2 >
%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and
%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * }
%<aunm-semi> { ";" * }
%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * }
'skip$
if$
%</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
t "others" =
{
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
%<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
}
%<*!xand>
{
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper> bbl.and
%<amper> "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font
space.word * t *
}
%</!xand>
%<xand> { " " * t * }
if$
}
if$
}
't
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ bib.name.font }
if$
%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
} if$
%</!ed-rev&!ed-au>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.key'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {format.key}
{ empty$
{ key field.or.null }
{ "" }
if$
}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.authors'}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: Add code to emit collaboration.}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.authors}
{ author "author" format.names
%<*revdata>
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ " (" swap$ * ")" * }
if$
*
}
if$
%</revdata>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: access function for editor text entity}
% Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.editors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editors for further processing.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 6}{Add option \texttt{edparxc}}
% The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses.
% In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option
% \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs},
% this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions.
% Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is
% some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}:
% the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is
% also called.
%
% Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle};
% the two should be kept coordinated.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.editors}
{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," *
" " *
get.bbl.editor
%<bkedcap> capitalize
%<edpar|edparc|edparxc> "(" swap$ * ")" *
*
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: code subsumed into
% \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}}
% See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above.
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*pg-bk>
FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
{ pages "pages" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ " " * bbl.pages * }
if$
}
%</pg-bk>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate isbn for further processing}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*isbn>
FUNCTION {format.isbn}
{ isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
"ISBN " swap$ *
}
if$
}
%</isbn>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.issn'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate issn for further processing}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*issn>
FUNCTION {format.issn}
{ issn "issn" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
"ISSN " swap$ *
}
if$
}
%</issn>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.doi'}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add function}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*doi>
FUNCTION {format.doi}
{ doi "doi" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<!html> "\doi{" swap$ * "}" *
%<html> "doi:" swap$ *
}
if$
}
%</doi>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`select.language'}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
% The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the
% University of Freiburg.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*lang>
FUNCTION {select.language}
{ duplicate$ empty$
'pop$
{ language empty$
'skip$
{ "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
if$
}
if$
}
%</lang>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.note'}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Add macro}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 May 26}{Fix so unmatched brace warning suppressed}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add option \texttt{url-nt}}
% Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own.
% However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence,
% the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper
% noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces
% with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading
% character is an opening brace.
%
% With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and
% added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This
% means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that
% sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate note for further processing}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sep 14}{PWD: remove url with \texttt{revdata}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.note}
{
%<*url-nt&!revdata>
url empty$
'skip$
%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output }
%<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
%<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * output }
if$
%</url-nt&!revdata>
note empty$
{ "" }
{ note #1 #1 substring$
duplicate$ "{" =
'skip$
{ output.state mid.sentence =
{ "l" }
{ "u" }
if$
change.case$
}
if$
note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.title'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add enquote function to put titles in quotes,
% such that punctuation is inside quotes.}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Apr 17}{Fix bug in quoted title and \texttt{blk-com}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add \texttt{qx} option, for comma outside
% quotes}
% For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote.
% Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside.
% Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes
% outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com})
% is added outside only when punctuation is absent.
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.title}
{ title
%<*!atit-u>
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ "t" change.case$ }
if$
%</!atit-u>
"title" bibinfo.check
%<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<tit-it> emphasize
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
"\enquote{" swap$ *
%<*!qx>
%<*blk-com>
non.stop
%<!com-semi&!com-blank> { ",} " * }
%<com-semi> { ";} " * }
%<!com-semi&com-blank> { "} " * }
{ "} " * }
if$
%</blk-com>
%<!blk-com> add.period$ "}" *
%</!qx>
%<*qx>
%<*blk-com>
%<!com-semi&!com-blank> "}, " *
%<com-semi> "}; " *
%<!com-semi&com-blank> "} " *
%</blk-com>
%<!blk-com> "}" *
%</qx>
%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
%<lang> select.language
}
if$
%</tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add macro to finish off quoted titles}
% For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas
% between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present,
% so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This
% is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but
% only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after
% titles are output.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*blk-com&tit-qq>
FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
{ title empty$
'skip$
{ before.all 'output.state := }
if$
}
%</blk-com&tit-qq>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
% Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of
% proceedings and collections are quoted, and if
% neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected
% (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run).
% These options add text after the booktitle,
% so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor!
%
% Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}
% has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been.
% Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still
% on the stack?
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*bt-qq>
FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle}
{ booktitle empty$
'skip$
%<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc> { before.all 'output.state := }
%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
{ editor empty$
{ before.all 'output.state := }
'skip$
if$
}
%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
if$
}
%</bt-qq>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'}
% \changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Add key labels to \texttt{calc.long.label} and
% get {\tt'author} and {\tt'editor} in right order when author
% missing.}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Remove \texttt{calc.long.label} and
% \texttt{format.long.lab.names}, replacing them with
% \texttt{format.full.names}, \texttt{make.full.names}, and adding
% \texttt{author.editor.key}, \texttt{author.key}, and \texttt{editor.key}}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Remove option \texttt{and-com} from
% \texttt{make.full.names}}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Suppress `and' in full list if suppressed in short}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Font of `and' in lists same as in citations}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Fix location of \texttt{and-xcom} code}
% In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label}
% and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string
% \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list.
% However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an
% earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string
% \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on
% my system. Author lists were truncated. Thus, \texttt{make.full.names}
% is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the
% \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This
% involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially
% \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later.
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
% from last format function}
% \changes{3.98}{1999 May 28}{Fix bug with \texttt{harnm}, missing brace}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Format juniors to be same as for \texttt{format.lab.names}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*har|cay|nat>
FUNCTION {format.full.names}
{'s :=
"" 't :=
#1 'nameptr :=
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames 'namesleft :=
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ s nameptr
%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
't :=
nameptr #1 >
{
%<*nmlm>
%<m1> nameptr #1
%<m2> nameptr #2
%<m3> nameptr #3
%<m4> nameptr #4
%<m5> nameptr #5
%<m6> nameptr #6
%<m7> nameptr #7
%<m8> nameptr #8
%<m9> nameptr #9
%<m0> nameptr #0
%<m10> #10 +
%<m20> #20 +
%<m30> #30 +
%<m40> #40 +
%<m50> #50 +
%<m60> #60 +
%<m70> #70 +
%<m80> #80 +
%<m90> #90 +
#1 + =
%<x1> numnames #1
%<x2> numnames #2
%<x3> numnames #3
%<x4> numnames #4
%<x5> numnames #5
%<x6> numnames #6
%<x7> numnames #7
%<x8> numnames #8
%<x9> numnames #9
%<x0> numnames #0
%<x10> #10 +
%<x20> #20 +
%<x30> #30 +
%<x40> #40 +
%<x50> #50 +
%<x60> #60 +
%<x70> #70 +
%<x80> #80 +
%<x90> #90 +
> and
{ "others" 't :=
#1 'namesleft := }
'skip$
if$
%</nmlm>
namesleft #1 >
{ ", " * t * }
{
s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
{ 't := }
{ pop$ }
if$
t "others" =
{
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
}
{
%<*!harnm>
%<*!and-xcom>
numnames #2 >
{ "," * }
'skip$
if$
%</!and-xcom>
%<!amper> bbl.and
%<amper> "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
space.word * t *
}
if$
}
if$
}
't
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ cite.name.font }
if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}
FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full}
{ author empty$
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
'key
if$
}
{ editor format.full.names }
if$
}
{ author format.full.names }
if$
}
FUNCTION {author.key.full}
{ author empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
'key
if$
}
{ author format.full.names }
if$
}
FUNCTION {editor.key.full}
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
'key
if$
}
{ editor format.full.names }
if$
}
FUNCTION {make.full.names}
{ type$ "book" =
type$ "inbook" =
or
'author.editor.key.full
{ type$ "proceedings" =
'editor.key.full
'author.key.full
if$
}
if$
}
%</har|cay|nat>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'}
%\changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Test for missing year, set to {\tt????}.}
% The \texttt{output.bibitem} function formats the |\bibitem| entries.
%\changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Move to later location, add
% \texttt{make.full.names} instead of inserting string \texttt{long.label}}
%\changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{nat} for full author list
% for \texttt{natbib.sty} version~5.3}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 18}{For \texttt{nat}, put label in braces}
% A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets
% are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any
% problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but
% only for the \texttt{nat} option.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
{ newline$
%<*!html>
%<*ay>
%<!har&!nat> "\bibitem[" write$
%<!har&nat> "\bibitem[{" write$
%<har> "\harvarditem" write$
%<nmd> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$
%<ast> "\protect\astroncite{" write$
%<cay> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$
%<cn> "\protect\citename{" write$
%<!har> label write$
%<har> make.full.names duplicate$ label =
%<har> 'skip$
%<har> { "[" label * "]" * write$ }
%<har> if$
%<har> "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$
%<har> year duplicate$ empty$
%<cn> ", }" year duplicate$ empty$
%<cay|nmd|ast> "}{" year duplicate$ empty$
%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear> { pop$ "" }
%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear> { pop$ "????" }
%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> 'skip$
%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> if$
%<har> extra.label * "}{" * write$
%<cn> * extra.label * "]{" * write$
%<cay|nmd|ast> * extra.label * "}]{" * write$
%<alk> "]{" write$
%<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)> ")]{" write$
%<nat> ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
%<nat> { pop$ }
%<nat> { * }
%<nat> if$
%<nat> "}]{" * write$
%</ay>
%<!ay&!(cite|alph)> "\bibitem{" write$
%<!ay&(cite|alph)> "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$
cite$ write$
"}" write$
newline$
""
%</!html>
%<*html>
%<*htdes>
"<dt><strong><tt>" write$
cite$ write$
"</tt></strong></dt>" write$ newline$
"<dd>"
%</htdes>
%<htlist&!htdes> "<li>"
%<!htlist&!htdes> "<p>"
%</html>
before.all 'output.state :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`if.digit'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro}
% Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers
% to a separated number.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
FUNCTION {if.digit}
{ duplicate$ "0" =
swap$ duplicate$ "1" =
swap$ duplicate$ "2" =
swap$ duplicate$ "3" =
swap$ duplicate$ "4" =
swap$ duplicate$ "5" =
swap$ duplicate$ "6" =
swap$ duplicate$ "7" =
swap$ duplicate$ "8" =
swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`n.separate'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro for options \texttt{pgsep-c},
% \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}}
% Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma
% or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs.
% No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {n.separate}
{ 't :=
""
#0 'numnames :=
{ t empty$ not }
{ t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit
{ numnames #1 + 'numnames := }
{ #0 'numnames := }
if$
t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *
t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
numnames #5 =
{ duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$
#3 global.max$ substring$
%<pgsep-c> "," swap$ * *
%<pgsep-p> "." swap$ * *
%<pgsep-s&!html> "\," swap$ * *
%<pgsep-s&html> " " swap$ * *
}
'skip$
if$
}
while$
}
%</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {n.dashify}
{
%<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> n.separate
't :=
""
{ t empty$ not }
{ t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
{ t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
{ "--" *
t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
}
{ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
{ "-" *
t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
}
while$
}
if$
}
{ t #1 #1 substring$ *
t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
}
if$
}
while$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`word.in'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Function \texttt{word.in} constructed out of
% \texttt{bbl.in} or \texttt{bbl.iin}.}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 16}{Use only \texttt{bbl.in} and capitalize it
% as necessary; remove \texttt{bbl.iin}}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add option \texttt{in-x} to suppress `in'}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Add option \texttt{in-it} to italicize `in'}
% The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references
% that are
% contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a
% colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are
% to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains
% in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as
% sentences, then it must be capitalized.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {word.in}
%<in-x>{ "" }
%<*!in-x>
%<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in
%<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize
%<in-col> ":" *
%<in-it> emphasize
" " * }
%</!in-x>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.date'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{yr-per} to put period
% before date}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} bracket names to year
% with new option \texttt{harnm}}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add \texttt{yr-blk} for no punctuation before
% the date}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{dtrev} option for year month}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{mth-bare} for dotless abbreviation
% of months}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add \texttt{volp-dt} for date after volume}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add brace pair after
% \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright}}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Add \texttt{aymth} option for months in dates}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add \texttt{vnum-dt} option}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Add \texttt{yr-com} option}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 12}{Fix bug that left off extra label for plain year}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{vnum-dt} with \texttt{jdt-vs}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{jdt-v}}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Do \texttt{yr-blk} right}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add \texttt{jdt-pc} to add comma after year}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{xmth} to suppress month for numericals}
% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{For \texttt{harnm}, suppress punctuation before date}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{blkyear} option}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the date for further processing}
% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date
% in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright|
% in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm},
% which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that
% this overrides the other year formatting options.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {format.date}
{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
{
%<*!blkyear>
"empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
pop$ "????"
%</!blkyear>
}
'skip$
if$
%<*aymth>
month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
'skip$
{
%<dtrev> swap$
" " * swap$
}
if$
*
%<mth-bare> remove.dots
%</aymth>
%<dtbf> bolden
extra.label *
%<*!harnm>
%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
before.all 'output.state :=
%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state :=
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ *
%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> before.all 'output.state :=
%<harnm> " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" *
}
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {format.date}
{
%<!xmth> month "month" bibinfo.check
%<xmth> ""
duplicate$ empty$
year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
{ swap$ 'skip$
{ "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }
if$
*
}
{ swap$ 'skip$
{
%<showstack> month year
%<!dtrev> swap$
" " * swap$
}
if$
*
%<mth-bare> remove.dots
}
if$
%<dtbf> bolden
%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
duplicate$ empty$
'skip$
{
before.all 'output.state :=
%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ *
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state :=
%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ *
}
if$
%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.year'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add function}
% For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a
% special formatter separate from the regular date formatter.
% The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name).
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate year for further processing}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
FUNCTION{format.year}
{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
{ "empty year in " cite$ *
%<ay&!blkyear> "; set to ????" *
warning$
%<ay&!blkyear> pop$ "????"
}
{
%<!ay&jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!ay&!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" *
}
if$
%<*ay>
extra.label *
%<jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" *
%<!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" *
%</ay>
}
%</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.btitle}
{ title "title" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!btit-rm> emphasize
%<lang> select.language
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {either.or.check}
{ empty$
'pop$
{ "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'}
% \changes{4.11}{2003 Jun 23}{Add \texttt{ser-vol}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
{ volume empty$
{ "" }
{ bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix
"volume" bibinfo.check * *
series "series" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
%<*!ser-vol>
{ swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$
emphasize * }
%</!ser-vol>
%<ser-vol> { emphasize ", " * swap$ * }
if$
"volume and number" number either.or.check
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.number.series}
{ volume empty$
{ number empty$
{ series field.or.null }
%<*num-xser>
{ series empty$
{ number "number" bibinfo.check }
{ output.state mid.sentence =
{ bbl.number }
{ bbl.number capitalize }
if$
number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
bbl.in space.word *
series "series" bibinfo.check *
}
if$
}
%</num-xser>
%<*!num-xser>
{ output.state mid.sentence =
{ bbl.number }
{ bbl.number capitalize }
if$
number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
series empty$
{ "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ }
{ bbl.in space.word *
series "series" bibinfo.check *
}
if$
}
%</!num-xser>
if$
}
{ "" }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`is.num'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to test for digit.}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns
% 1 if it is a digit, else 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!xedn>
FUNCTION {is.num}
{ chr.to.int$
duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`extract.num'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to extract leading number from
% a literal string.}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a
% number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains
% no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert
% \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is.
% This is used by {\tt convert.edition}.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {extract.num}
{ duplicate$ 't :=
"" 's :=
{ t empty$ not }
{ t #1 #1 substring$
t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
duplicate$ is.num
{ s swap$ * 's := }
{ pop$ "" 't := }
if$
}
while$
s empty$
'skip$
{ pop$ s }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to convert \texttt{edition} entry
% text from word to a function}
% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: change calling sequence: arg on stack}
% The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field
% \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As
% originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words
% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit,
% it is not so easy to translate, nor to
% convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted.
% This function carries out the translation, by changing
% \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so
% on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no
% translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used
% instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than
% the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to
% it.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {convert.edition}
{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
s "first" = s "1" = or
{ bbl.first 't := }
{ s "second" = s "2" = or
{ bbl.second 't := }
{ s "third" = s "3" = or
{ bbl.third 't := }
{ s "fourth" = s "4" = or
{ bbl.fourth 't := }
{ s "fifth" = s "5" = or
{ bbl.fifth 't := }
{ s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
%<!english&exlang> { s bbl.th * 't := }
%<english|!exlang> { s eng.ord 't := }
{ edition 't := }
if$
}
if$
}
if$
}
if$
}
if$
}
if$
t
}
%</!xedn>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.edition'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add call to \texttt{convert.edition}}
% This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as
% ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word
% \textsl{edition}.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate edition for further processing.}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.edition}
{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<!xedn> convert.edition
output.state mid.sentence =
{ "l" }
{ "t" }
if$ change.case$
"edition" bibinfo.check
" " * bbl.edition *
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { multiresult }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
{ 't :=
#0 'multiresult :=
{ multiresult not
t empty$ not
and
}
{ t #1 #1 substring$
duplicate$ "-" =
swap$ duplicate$ "," =
swap$ "+" =
or or
{ #1 'multiresult := }
{ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
if$
}
while$
multiresult
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.pages'}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-par}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-x}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Dec 10}{Add \texttt{!ppx} test to avoid extra space}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.pages}
{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ duplicate$ multi.page.check
{
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.pages swap$
n.dashify
}
{
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.page swap$
}
if$
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> tie.or.space.prefix
"pages" bibinfo.check
%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> * *
%<bkpg-par> "(" swap$ * ")" *
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`first.page'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*jpg-1>
FUNCTION {first.page}
{ 't :=
""
{ t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
{ t #1 #1 substring$ *
t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
}
while$
}
%</jpg-1>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Remove from \texttt{format.vol.num.pages} to
% be a separate function}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Remove option \texttt{vnum-pg}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
%
% Note: this function gets called with something on the stack.
% It may be the volume and number.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
{ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ pop$ format.pages }
{
%<volp-sp> ": " *
%<*!volp-sp>
%<volp-blk> " " *
%<*!volp-blk>
%<volp-com> ", " *
%<*!volp-com>
%<volp-semi> "; " *
%<!volp-semi> ":" *
%</!volp-com>
%</!volp-blk>
%</!volp-sp>
%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p> format.year * " " *
%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc> format.year * ", " *
swap$
%<jpg-1> first.page
%<!jpg-1> n.dashify
%<*jwdpg>
pages multi.page.check
'bbl.pages
'bbl.page
if$
swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
%</jwdpg>
"pages" bibinfo.check
%<jwdpg> * *
*
}
if$
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add function to emit the eid information.}
% This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number)
% and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty.
% Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}.
%
% For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number
% is appended too.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
{ swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<volp-sp> ": " *
%<*!volp-sp>
%<volp-blk> " " *
%<*!volp-blk>
%<volp-com> ", " *
%<*!volp-com>
%<volp-semi> "; " *
%<!volp-semi> ":" *
%</!volp-com>
%</!volp-blk>
%</!volp-sp>
}
if$
swap$ *
%<*revdata>
numpages empty$ 'skip$
{ bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix
"numpages" bibinfo.check * *
" (" swap$ * ")" * *
}
if$
%</revdata>
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'}
% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{volp-sp} to put space
% after colon in vol:~page.}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Add options \texttt{vnum-h},
% \texttt{vnum-nr} and \texttt{vnum-x} for various formats of
% journal vol number}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add options \texttt{vnum-sp} and
% \texttt{vnum-cm}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Add option \texttt{volp-semi}}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Put \texttt{bolden} in right place for
% \texttt{vol-2bf} option}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Put date between volume and number}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add possibilitity of `page' word}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Activate \texttt{jwdpg} option properly}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add possibilitity of `volume' word}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add option \texttt{pp-last}}
% Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the
% journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be
% more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I
% do not like to do.
%
% The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and
% sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries
% that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to
% \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well.
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the volume and number for
% further processing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages}
{ volume field.or.null
duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<jwdvol> bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
"volume" bibinfo.check
%<jwdvol> * *
}
if$
%<vol-bf&!vol-2bf> bolden
%<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it> emphasize
%<jdt-v|jdt-vs> format.year *
%<*!vnum-x>
number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
swap$ duplicate$ empty$
{ "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
'skip$
if$
swap$
%<vnum-sp> "~(" swap$ * ")" *
%<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm> ", " swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr> ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h> ", \#" swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b> " " swap$ *
%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b> "(" swap$ * ")" *
}
if$ *
%<!vol-bf&vol-2bf> bolden
%</!vnum-x>
%<*!pp-last>
eid empty$
{ format.journal.pages }
{ format.journal.eid }
if$
%</!pp-last>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate series and chapter for
% further processing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
{ chapter empty$
%<!pp-last> 'format.pages
%<pp-last> { "" }
{ type empty$
{ bbl.chapter }
{ type "l" change.case$
"type" bibinfo.check
}
if$
chapter tie.or.space.prefix
"chapter" bibinfo.check
* *
%<*!pp-last>
pages empty$
'skip$
{ ", " * format.pages * }
if$
%</!pp-last>
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: trap \texttt{empty\$} argument}
% This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes.
% If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already
% exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that
% |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*bt-qq>
FUNCTION {bt.enquote}
{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{ "\enquote{" swap$ *
%<*!qx>
non.stop
{ ",} " * }
{ "}, " * }
if$
%</!qx>
%<*qx>
"}, " *
%</qx>
}
if$
}
%</bt-qq>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: new function}
% The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object
% (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack.
% It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
% and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing
% the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output.
%
% If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
{
booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check
%<!bt-qq&!bt-rm> emphasize
%<bt-qq> bt.enquote
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{edby-par} to put editors
% in parentheses}
% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{If \texttt{ed} and \texttt{edby} given
% together, abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 2}{Add option \texttt{edbyx} to replace `edited by'
% by `ed(s).'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{edcap}}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 10}{Fix bug that added extra space sometimes}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Book titles may also be roman}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{New options \texttt{edby-parc} and \texttt{edbyw}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: rewritten; encapsulates \texttt{booktitle} and
% \texttt{editor} for later processing}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: fix up several bugs}
% Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in
% parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly.
% Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized.
%
% Notes on \dtx{} options:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
% The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface:
% \begin{verbatim}
% (
% <default>
% |edby ( |edbyx |edbyy|edbyw[edcap])
% |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy )
% |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx )
% )
% \end{verbatim}
% \item
% \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive
% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
% \item
% \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive
% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
% \item
% \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options.
% \item
% When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective
% \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive.
% It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of
% \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect.
% \item
% \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases,
% but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the
% ``editor'' text entity.
% \item
% The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+
% \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}.
% This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by
% a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases.
% \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus
% volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume}
% from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
{
%<showstack>% btitle
%<*ser-ed>
format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
{ ", " swap$ * * }
if$
%</ser-ed>
editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
{
%<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms
%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," *
" " *
get.bbl.editor
%<bkedcap> capitalize
%<edpar> "(" swap$ * "), " *
%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)> "(" swap$ * ") " *
%<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)> ", " *
* swap$
%<showstack>% eds btitle
%</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms
%<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw> get.bbl.editor
%<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)> bbl.edby
%<edcap> capitalize
%<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" *
%<showstack>% btitle ednms ed
%<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy> swap$ "," *
" " * swap$ *
%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed
%<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" *
swap$
%<edby|edby-parc> "," *
" " * swap$
%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle)
* }
if$
%<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle)
word.in swap$ *
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {empty.misc.check}
{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$
month empty$ year empty$ note empty$
and and and and and
%<!seq-no|alph> key empty$ not and
{ "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }
'skip$
if$
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
{ type duplicate$ empty$
'pop$
{ swap$ pop$
"t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'}
% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Encapsulate number}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
{ number "number" bibinfo.check
type duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ bbl.techrep }
'skip$
if$
"type" bibinfo.check
swap$ duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$ "t" change.case$ }
{ tie.or.space.prefix * * }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{journal} with
% \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate journal for further processing.}
% The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
{
%<*!ay>
key duplicate$ empty$
{ pop$
journal duplicate$ empty$
{ "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ }
{ "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * }
if$
}
{ word.in swap$ * " " *}
if$
%</!ay>
%<ay> word.in
%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: editor encapsulated for later processing}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: fixed typo: "etal_rm"->"etal-rm"}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor}
{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
"editor" bibinfo.check
editor num.names$ duplicate$
#2 >
{ pop$
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
"editor" bibinfo.check
" " * bbl.etal
%<etal-it> emphasize
*
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't :=
}
{ #2 <
'skip$
{ editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
{
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
"editor" bibinfo.check
" " * bbl.etal
%<etal-it> emphasize
*
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't :=
}
{
%<*!harnm>
%<!amper> bbl.and space.word
%<amper> " \& "
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> " \harvardand\ "
* editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
"editor" bibinfo.check
*
}
if$
}
if$
}
if$
%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check }
if$
%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{series} with
% \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate volume and series for
% further processing.}
% The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
{ volume duplicate$ empty$
{ "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
pop$ word.in
}
{ bbl.volume
%<!(blk-com|blk-tita)> capitalize
swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
}
if$
%<*!ay>
editor empty$
editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
or
{ key empty$
{ series empty$
{ "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
crossref * warning$
"" *
}
{ series emphasize * }
if$
}
{ key * }
if$
}
{ format.crossref.editor * }
if$
%</!ay>
%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'}
%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{booktitle} with
% \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.booktitle}}
% The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
% done by command.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
{
%<*!ay>
editor empty$
editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
or
{ key empty$
{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$
{ "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
crossref * warning$
}
{ word.in swap$ * }
if$
}
{ word.in key * " " *}
if$
}
{ word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *}
if$
%</!ay>
%<ay> word.in
%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Add option \texttt{add-pub} which makes use
% of this function}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Add option \texttt{pub-par} to put publisher
% in parentheses}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{pub-date} to put publisher
% and date in parentheses together}
% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add \texttt{add.blank} for \texttt{pub-par}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add extra label with \texttt{pub-date}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Option \texttt{pub-nopar} to suppress parentheses
% with \texttt{pub-date}}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Change to include organization if present}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Include \texttt{dtbf} option with \texttt{pub-date}}
% Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}.
%
% \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both
% are there, they are merged into one set.
%
% Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding
% punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses.
%
% MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add
% \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}.
%
% Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if
% present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where
% the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing,
% but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This
% complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have
% the date included, all in parentheses.
%
% This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and
% \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text
% into the stack first.
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate address and year for
% further processing.}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
{ 't :=
""
%<*pub-date&!ay>
year empty$
{ "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }
'skip$
if$
%</pub-date&!ay>
%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
address empty$ t empty$ and
%<pub-date> year empty$ and
'skip$
{
%</!(pub-date&ay)>
%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> add.blank "(" *
%<*add-pub>
address "address" bibinfo.check *
t empty$
'skip$
%</add-pub>
%<*!add-pub>
t empty$
{ address "address" bibinfo.check *
}
{ t *
address empty$
'skip$
{ ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * }
if$
}
%</!add-pub>
%<*add-pub>
{ address empty$
'skip$
{ ": " * }
if$
t *
}
%</add-pub>
if$
%<*pub-date&!ay>
year empty$
'skip$
{ t empty$ address empty$ and
'skip$
{ ", " * }
if$
year "year" bibinfo.check
%<dtbf> bolden
*
}
if$
%</pub-date&!ay>
%<*pub-date&ay>
year duplicate$ empty$
%<*!blkyear>
{ "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
pop$ "????" }
%</!blkyear>
%<*blkyear>
{ "empty year in " cite$ * warning$
pop$ "" }
%</blkyear>
%<!dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * }
%<dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * }
if$
t empty$ address empty$ and
{ * }
%<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * }
%<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * }
if$
%</pub-date&ay>
%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> ")" *
%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
}
if$
%</!(pub-date&ay)>
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate \texttt{publisher}
% and \texttt{organization}}
% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 28}{Check with \texttt{bibinfo.warn}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'}
% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add function to replace repeated names by dash}
% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{Add double and triple dashes}
% This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value,
% and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack
% should be author or editor names for the current entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nmdash>
STRINGS {oldname}
FUNCTION {name.or.dash}
{ 's :=
oldname empty$
{ s 'oldname := s }
{ s oldname =
%<*!au-col>
%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" }
%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" }
%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" }
%</!au-col>
%<*au-col>
%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" add.blank }
%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" add.blank }
%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" add.blank }
%</au-col>
{ s 'oldname := s }
if$
}
if$
}
%</nmdash>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`article'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{yrp-x} to suppress
% punctuation following date at beginning}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Add option \texttt{yrp-col} to add colon after
% date at beginning}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{jxper} to remove periods
% from journal name}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add option \texttt{dt-jnl} to make date part of
% the journal specification, follows journal name.}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add option \texttt{au-col}}
% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Add option \texttt{jttl-rm}}
% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Put \texttt{purify\$} before \texttt{emphasize}}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{blk-tita} for article only}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{blknt} for period before notes}
% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{injnl} for `in' with journal
% names}
%
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.journal} and
% \texttt{format.journal.eid}; call \texttt{format.eprint}, and
% \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with texttt{injnl}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {article}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
format.date "year" output.check
date.block
%</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*blk-tit|blk-tita>
%<!tit-col> new.sentence
%<tit-col> add.colon
%</blk-tit|blk-tita>
%</!jtit-x>
crossref missing$
{
journal
%<jxper> remove.dots
"journal" bibinfo.check
%<!jttl-rm> emphasize
%<injnl> word.in swap$ *
"journal" output.check
%<jnm-x> add.blank
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
format.date "year" output.check
date.block
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
format.vol.num.pages output
%<doi&agu-doi> format.doi output
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
}
{ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
%<!pp-last> format.pages output
}
if$
%<*pp-last>
eid empty$
{ format.journal.pages }
{ format.journal.eid }
if$
%</pp-last>
%<issn> format.issn output
%<doi&!agu-doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<*revdata>
format.url output
%</revdata>
fin.entry
%<harnm|url-nl> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`book'}
%\changes{2.0a}{1994 Aug 30}{Fix up \texttt{new.sentence} so not added with
% \texttt{blk-com}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {book}
{ output.bibitem
author empty$
{ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
%<ay> editor format.key output
%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col> add.blank
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
}
{ format.authors output.nonnull
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
crossref missing$
{ "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
'skip$
if$
}
if$
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
crossref missing$
{ format.bvolume output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<pre-edn> format.edition output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
%<pg-bk&pg-pre> format.book.pages output
format.publisher.address output
}
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
format.book.crossref output.nonnull
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
}
if$
%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn> format.isbn output
%<pg-bk&!pg-pre> format.book.pages output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`booklet'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {booklet}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors output
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
%<isbn> format.isbn output
%<pg-bk> format.book.pages output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`inbook'}
% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} in place of
% \texttt{year} alone}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of
% the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages
% to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be
% no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now).
%
% The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some
% special entries, like this one.
%
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
% Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained.
% There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say
% with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always,
% even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway,
% since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {inbook}
{ output.bibitem
author empty$
{ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
%<ay> editor format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
}
{ format.authors output.nonnull
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
crossref missing$
{ "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
'skip$
if$
}
if$
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
crossref missing$
{
%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
format.bvolume output
%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<pre-edn> format.edition output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
}
{
%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
format.book.crossref output.nonnull
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
}
if$
%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<*isbn>
crossref missing$
{ format.isbn output }
'skip$
if$
%</isbn>
%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
format.date "year" output.check
date.block
%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`incollection'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
FUNCTION {incollection}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%</!jtit-x>
crossref missing$
{ format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle
%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<pre-edn> format.edition output
format.chapter.pages output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn> format.isbn output
}
{ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
format.chapter.pages output
}
if$
%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
format.date "year" output.check
date.block
%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize organization/publisher}
% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 5}{Fix extraneous page output without
% \texttt{pp-last}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{Fix bug with \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {inproceedings}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*!jtit-x>
format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%</!jtit-x>
crossref missing$
{ format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle
%<*!pre-pub>
%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
%</!pre-pub>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
publisher empty$
{ format.organization.address output }
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
format.publisher.address output
}
if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<*pre-pub>
format.bvolume output
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
%</pre-pub>
%<isbn> format.isbn output
%<issn> format.issn output
}
{ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
}
if$
%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
%<!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<!pub-date> date.block
%<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc> add.blank
format.pages "pages" output.check
%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`conference'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`manual'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {manual}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors output
author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb
organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
format.edition output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {manual}
{ output.bibitem
author empty$
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check
duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
{ output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
}
if$
}
{ format.authors output.nonnull }
if$
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
author empty$
{ organization empty$
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> address new.block.checka
address "address" bibinfo.check output
}
'skip$
if$
}
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb
organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
}
if$
format.edition output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
% articles instead of books.}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
% \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% To format a master's thesis.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*!thtit-x>
%<!thtit-a> format.btitle
%<thtit-a> format.title
"title" output.check
%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%</!thtit-x>
bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
school "school" bibinfo.warn output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`misc'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {misc}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors output
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
%<*ay>
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> title howpublished new.block.checkb
format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> howpublished new.block.checka
%</!ay>
howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
%<!ay> empty.misc.check
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
% articles instead of books.}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
% \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% To format a doctoral thesis.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {phdthesis}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<*!thtit-x>
%<!thtit-a> format.btitle
%<thtit-a> format.title
"title" output.check
%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%</!thtit-x>
bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
school "school" bibinfo.warn output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presentation'}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*pres>
FUNCTION {presentation}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors output
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.title output
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
month "month" output.check
year "year" output.check
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
new.sentence
type missing$ 'skip$
{"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
if$
%<*url-blk&!harnm>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm>
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
%</pres>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`proceedings'}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{For numerical, the number/series could be missing when editor there; fixed}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {proceedings}
{ output.bibitem
format.editors output
editor format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
format.bvolume output
%<!numser> format.number.series output
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
publisher empty$
{ format.organization.address output }
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
format.publisher.address output
}
if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn> format.isbn output
%<issn> format.issn output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
%</ay>
%<*!ay>
FUNCTION {proceedings}
{ output.bibitem
editor empty$
{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
}
{ format.editors output.nonnull }
if$
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.btitle "title" output.check
format.bvolume output
%<!numser> format.number.series output
editor empty$
{ publisher empty$
%<numser> { format.number.series output }
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
format.publisher.address output
}
if$
}
{ publisher empty$
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
format.organization.address output }
{
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
%<numser> format.number.series output
organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
format.publisher.address output
}
if$
}
if$
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
%<isbn> format.isbn output
%<issn> format.issn output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`techreport'}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Add option \texttt{trtit-b}}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{trnum-it}}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: institution via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
% \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {techreport}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<trtit-b> format.btitle
%<!trtit-b> format.title
"title" output.check
%<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
%<!trnum-it> format.tr.number output.nonnull
%<trnum-it> format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull
institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output
address "address" bibinfo.check output
%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note output
%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date "year" output.check
%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`unpublished'}
% \changes{3.85}{1997 Nov 25}{Fix date at normal end}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {unpublished}
{ output.bibitem
format.authors "author" output.check
%<ay> author format.key output
%<au-col> add.colon
%<nmdash> name.or.dash
%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
%<dt-beg> date.block
%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.title "title" output.check
%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
%<doi> format.doi output
%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.url output
%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
format.note "note" output.check
%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date output
%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
format.date output
%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
%<eprint> format.eprint output
%<revdata> format.url output
fin.entry
%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`default.type'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
READ
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph|!seq-no>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sortify'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Do not allow unsorted alphas}
% In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is
% left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error,
% because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away
% with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year
% listings.}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sortify}
{ purify$
"l" change.case$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { len }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`chop.word'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {chop.word}
{ 's :=
'len :=
s #1 len substring$ =
{ s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
's
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add option \texttt{alph} for \texttt{alpha.bst}
% style of labels}
% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 4}{Add options \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f}}
% \changes{3.85}{1997 Dec 1}{Add option \texttt{jnrlab}}
% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
% The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the
% \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}.
% Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no})
% versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating
% such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx.
% I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von}
% part of the name.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { et.al.char.used }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used}
{ #0 'et.al.char.used :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{ 's :=
%<*alf-1>
%<!vonx> s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
%<vonx> s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
{ pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
'skip$
if$
%</alf-1>
%<*!alf-1&alf-f>
%<!vonx> s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$
%<vonx> s #1 "{ll}" format.name$
%</!alf-1&alf-f>
%<*!alf-1&!alf-f>
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames #1 >
{ numnames #4 >
{ #3 'namesleft := }
{ numnames 'namesleft := }
if$
#1 'nameptr :=
""
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ nameptr numnames =
{ s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
{ "{\etalchar{+}}" *
#1 'et.al.char.used :=
}
%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
if$
}
%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
numnames #4 >
{ "{\etalchar{+}}" *
#1 'et.al.char.used :=
}
'skip$
if$
}
%<!vonx> { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
%<vonx> { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
{ pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
'skip$
if$
}
if$
%</!alf-1&!alf-f>
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
% from last format function}
% The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for
% more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay&!mcite>
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{ 's :=
"" 't :=
%<!jnrlab> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
s num.names$ duplicate$
#2 >
{ pop$
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't :=
}
{ #2 <
'skip$
{ s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
{
% %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't :=
}
%<*!harnm>
%<*!amper>
{ bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
* }
%</!amper>
%<*amper>
{ " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
* }
%</amper>
%</!harnm>
%<*harnm>
{ " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
* }
%</harnm>
if$
}
if$
}
if$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ cite.name.font }
if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}
%</ay&!mcite>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Add citations with more than one author with \emph{et~al.}}
% \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{Select number of authors before truncating}
% The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author
% before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating,
% is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay&mcite>
FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
{'s :=
"" 't :=
#1 'nameptr :=
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames 'namesleft :=
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ s nameptr
%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
%<*jnrlab>
%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
%</jnrlab>
%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
't :=
nameptr #1 >
{
%<mct-1> nameptr #2 =
%<mct-2> nameptr #3 =
%<mct-3> nameptr #4 =
%<mct-4> nameptr #5 =
%<mct-5> nameptr #6 =
%<mct-x2> numnames #2 > and
%<mct-x3> numnames #3 > and
%<mct-x4> numnames #4 > and
%<mct-x5> numnames #5 > and
{ "others" 't :=
#1 'namesleft := }
'skip$
if$
namesleft #1 >
{ ", " * t * }
{
s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
{ 't := }
{ pop$ }
if$
t "others" =
{
%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
%<*!etal-it>
%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
%</!etal-it>
%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
}
{
%<*!harnm>
%<*!and-xcom>
numnames #2 >
{ "," * }
'skip$
if$
%</!and-xcom>
%<!amper> bbl.and
%<amper> "\&"
%</!harnm>
%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
space.word * t *
}
if$
}
if$
}
't
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
%<*lab&!and-rm>
t "others" =
'skip$
{ cite.name.font }
if$
%</lab&!and-rm>
}
%</ay&mcite>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'}
% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'}
% Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and
% \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and
% \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for
% numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections.
% This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for
% author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical.
% That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph>
FUNCTION {author.key.label}
{ author empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
%<ay> 'key
%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ author format.lab.names }
if$
}
FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
{ author empty$
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
%<ay> 'key
%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ editor format.lab.names }
if$
}
{ author format.lab.names }
if$
}
%</ay|alph>
%<*!ay&alph>
FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label}
{ author empty$
{ key empty$
{ organization empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
{ "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ key #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ author format.lab.names }
if$
}
FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label}
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ organization empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
{ "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ key #3 text.prefix$ }
if$
}
{ editor format.lab.names }
if$
}
%</!ay&alph>
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
'key
if$
}
{ editor format.lab.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add function to store short list of authors
% for later test}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
{ type$ "book" =
type$ "inbook" =
or
'author.editor.key.label
{ type$ "proceedings" =
'editor.key.label
'author.key.label
if$
}
if$
'short.list :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.label'}
% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option \texttt{note-yr}}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add options \texttt{lab-bf} and \texttt{lab-sc}}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{calc.label} from \texttt{alpha.bst}}
% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{keyxyr} option}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.label}
{ calc.short.authors
short.list
%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)> "("
%<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn> ", "
*
year duplicate$ empty$
%<keyxyr> short.list key field.or.null = or
%<(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "" }
%<!(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "????" }
%<!note-yr> { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ }
%<note-yr> 'skip$
if$
*
'label :=
}
%</ay>
%<*!ay&alph>
FUNCTION {calc.label}
{ type$ "book" =
type$ "inbook" =
or
'author.editor.key.label
{ type$ "proceedings" =
'editor.key.organization.label
{ type$ "manual" =
'author.key.organization.label
'author.key.label
if$
}
if$
}
if$
duplicate$
year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$
*
'label :=
year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$
*
sortify 'sort.label :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {calc.short.label}
{ calc.short.authors short.list
'label :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'}
% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Make ordering of `et al' works by year
% and authors and not just year}
% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Add option \texttt{vonx} so sorting ignores the
% \emph{von} part of the name}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{For limited authors, sort only on those present}
% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{`Et al' considered author before all others}
% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{`Et al' considered author after all others}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
{ 's :=
#1 'nameptr :=
""
s num.names$ 'numnames :=
numnames 'namesleft :=
{ namesleft #0 > }
{ s nameptr
%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}"
%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}"
%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}"
%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}"
%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
format.name$ 't :=
nameptr #1 >
{
%<*nmlm>
%<m1> nameptr #1
%<m2> nameptr #2
%<m3> nameptr #3
%<m4> nameptr #4
%<m5> nameptr #5
%<m6> nameptr #6
%<m7> nameptr #7
%<m8> nameptr #8
%<m9> nameptr #9
%<m0> nameptr #0
%<m10> #10 +
%<m20> #20 +
%<m30> #30 +
%<m40> #40 +
%<m50> #50 +
%<m60> #60 +
%<m70> #70 +
%<m80> #80 +
%<m90> #90 +
#1 + =
%<x1> numnames #1
%<x2> numnames #2
%<x3> numnames #3
%<x4> numnames #4
%<x5> numnames #5
%<x6> numnames #6
%<x7> numnames #7
%<x8> numnames #8
%<x9> numnames #9
%<x0> numnames #0
%<x10> #10 +
%<x20> #20 +
%<x30> #30 +
%<x40> #40 +
%<x50> #50 +
%<x60> #60 +
%<x70> #70 +
%<x80> #80 +
%<x90> #90 +
> and
{ "others" 't :=
#1 'namesleft := }
'skip$
if$
%</nmlm>
" " *
namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
{ "zzzzz" * }
%<*seq-lab|seq-key>
{ numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and
{ "zz" * year field.or.null * " " * }
'skip$
if$
t sortify *
}
%</seq-lab|seq-key>
%<!seq-lab&!seq-key> { t sortify * }
if$
}
{ t sortify * }
if$
nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
}
while$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
{ 't :=
"A " #2
"An " #3
"The " #4 t chop.word
chop.word
chop.word
sortify
#1 global.max$ substring$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.sort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.sort}
{ author empty$
{ key empty$
{ "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
""
}
{ key sortify }
if$
}
{ author sort.format.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
{ author empty$
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
""
}
{ key sortify }
if$
}
{ editor sort.format.names }
if$
}
{ author sort.format.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`negate.year'}
% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add function for ordering by descending years}
% This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its
% complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used
% to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
FUNCTION {negate.year}
{ year empty$
{ "99999" }
{ year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$
year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
}
if$
}
%</seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {editor.sort}
{ editor empty$
{ key empty$
{ "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
""
}
{ key sortify }
if$
}
{ editor sort.format.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*seq-no>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { seq.num }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`init.seq'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {init.seq}
{ #0 'seq.num :=}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {init.seq}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
#-1 #10 substring$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</seq-no>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{seq-no} to author--year}
% For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in
% \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {presort}
{ calc.label
label sortify
" "
*
%<*!seq-no>
type$ "book" =
type$ "inbook" =
or
'author.editor.sort
{ type$ "proceedings" =
'editor.sort
'author.sort
if$
}
if$
#1 entry.max$ substring$
%</!seq-no>
%<*seq-no>
seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
seq.num int.to.fix
%</seq-no>
'sort.label :=
sort.label
*
" "
*
%<seq-yr> " " * year field.or.null *
%<seq-yrr&!seq-yr> " " * negate.year field.or.null *
%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
title field.or.null
sort.format.title
%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$
*
#1 entry.max$ substring$
'sort.key$ :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {author.organization.sort}
{ author empty$
{ organization empty$
{ key empty$
{ "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
""
}
{ key sortify }
if$
}
{ "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
if$
}
{ author sort.format.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort}
{ editor empty$
{ organization empty$
{ key empty$
{ "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
""
}
{ key sortify }
if$
}
{ "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
if$
}
{ editor sort.format.names }
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {presort}
%<*alph>
{ calc.label
sort.label
" "
*
type$ "book" =
%</alph>
%<!alph>{ type$ "book" =
type$ "inbook" =
or
'author.editor.sort
{ type$ "proceedings" =
'editor.organization.sort
{ type$ "manual" =
'author.organization.sort
'author.sort
if$
}
if$
}
if$
%<alph> *
" "
*
%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify
%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify
%<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph> *
" "
*
%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph> swap$ *
title field.or.null
sort.format.title
*
#1 entry.max$ substring$
'sort.key$ :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {presort}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
SORT
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay|alph|!seq-no>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{`forward.pass'}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Include number of references in argument to
% \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
% With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be
% used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment
% must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label.
% Simply count the references and add this number as the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
"" 'next.extra :=
#0 'last.extra.num :=
#0 'number.label :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {forward.pass}
{ last.label label =
{ last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
}
{ "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
"" 'extra.label :=
label 'last.label :=
}
if$
number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
{ "" 'longest.label :=
#0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label :=
"" 'next.extra :=
#0 'longest.label.width :=
#0 'last.extra.num :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {forward.pass}
{ last.sort.label sort.label =
{ last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
}
{ "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
"" 'extra.label :=
sort.label 'last.sort.label :=
}
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'}
% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Put extra label in braces}
% The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit.
% This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS
% emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for
% non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces.
% The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which
% authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for
% the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense,
% so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and
% year.
%
% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab}}
% The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib}
% styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical
% citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to
% be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous.
% The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the
% entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
{ next.extra "b" =
{ "a" 'extra.label := }
'skip$
if$
extra.label 'next.extra :=
extra.label
%<xlab-it> emphasize
%<*!html>
duplicate$ empty$
'skip$
{ "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
if$
%</!html>
'extra.label :=
%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)> label extra.label * 'label :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
{ next.extra "b" =
{ "a" 'extra.label := }
'skip$
if$
label extra.label * 'label :=
label width$ longest.label.width >
{ label 'longest.label :=
label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
}
'skip$
if$
extra.label 'next.extra :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&alph>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
%<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay|alph>
ITERATE {forward.pass}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
REVERSE {reverse.pass}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay|alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*ay>
FUNCTION {bib.sort.order}
{ sort.label
" "
*
%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify
%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify
%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key)> swap$
*
" "
*
%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
title field.or.null
sort.format.title
%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$
*
#1 entry.max$ substring$
'sort.key$ :=
%<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast> calc.short.label
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {bib.sort.order}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
SORT
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</ay>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!ay&!alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
STRINGS { longest.label }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
{ "" 'longest.label :=
#1 'number.label :=
#0 'longest.label.width :=
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}
%<*!cite>
{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=
number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
%</!cite>
%<cite>{ cite$ 'label :=
label width$ longest.label.width >
{ label 'longest.label :=
label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
}
'skip$
if$
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {longest.label.pass}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!ay&!alph>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{german}, add the definition of
% {\tt\protect\bslash qq} to replace double-quote character.}
% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{babel}, read in file
% \texttt{babelbst.tex} in \texttt{thebibliography} to define the word
% commands.}
% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument}
% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: provide default meanings for procedures used.}
% The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl}
% file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography}
% environment is invoked.
%
% Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously
% named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so
% propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over.
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {begin.bib}
%<*!html>
%<*!ay&alph>
{ et.al.char.used
{ "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ }
'skip$
if$
preamble$ empty$
%</!ay&alph>
%<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$
'skip$
{ preamble$ write$ newline$ }
if$
%<ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" *
%<!ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" *
write$ newline$
%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
"\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
"\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$
"\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}"
write$ newline$
"\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}"
write$ newline$
"\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
%<*!plntx>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}"
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}"
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}"
%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}"
%</plntx>
%<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
%<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%"
%<plntx> "\def\guillemotleft{%"
write$ newline$
" \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}"
write$ newline$
%<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%"
%<plntx> "\def\guillemotright{%"
write$ newline$
" \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}"
write$ newline$
%<!plntx> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
%<plntx> "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
%</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
%<!tit-it&tit-qq> write$ newline$
%<umlaut> "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$
%<em-ul> "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi"
%<em-ul> write$ newline$
%<*ay>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi"
write$ newline$
%<*har>
"{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$
"|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}"
write$ newline$
%</har>
%</ay>
%<*nmft&nmft-def>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx> write$ newline$
%<plntx> " \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</nmft&nmft-def>
%<*nmft&fnm-def>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx> write$ newline$
%<plntx> " \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</nmft&fnm-def>
%<*lab&lab-def>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax"
%<plntx> write$ newline$
%<plntx> " \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</lab&lab-def>
%<*(url&!harnm)|eprint>
%<*!plntx>
%<nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}"
%<!nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}"
write$ newline$
"\providecommand{\urlprefix}{URL }"
write$ newline$
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
"\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax"
write$ newline$
%<nfss> " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi"
%<!nfss> " \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi"
write$ newline$
"\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi"
write$ newline$
%</plntx>
%</(url&!harnm)|eprint>
%<*doi>
"\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax"
write$ newline$
%<*!plntx>
" \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else"
write$ newline$
" \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</!plntx>
%<*plntx>
" \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
write$ newline$
" \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else"
write$ newline$
" \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
write$ newline$
" \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi"
write$ newline$
%</plntx>
%</doi>
%<*lang>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}"
%<*plntx>
"\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax"
write$ newline$
" \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi"
%</plntx>
write$ newline$
%</lang>
%<*!plntx>
%<*babel>
"\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$
"\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$
"\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$
%</babel>
%<*annote>
"\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%"
write$ newline$
" \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
write$ newline$
" \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}"
write$ newline$
"\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%"
write$ newline$
" \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
write$ newline$
" \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}"
write$ newline$
%</annote>
%</!plntx>
%<*bibinfo>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</bibinfo>
%<*eprint>
%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}"
%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi"
write$ newline$
%</eprint>
}
%</!html>
%<*html>
{
"<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing</title></head>" write$ newline$
"<body>" write$ newline$
"<h2>Bibliography</h2>" write$ newline$
%<htdes>"<dl>" write$ newline$
%<!htdes&htlist>"<ol>" write$ newline$
}
%</html>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {begin.bib}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
ITERATE {call.type$}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{`end.bib'}
% \begin{macrocode}
FUNCTION {end.bib}
{ newline$
%<!html> "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
%<html> "</dl></body></html>" write$ newline$
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
EXECUTE {end.bib}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!head>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!options&!driver&!bblbst>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English}
% The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language
% selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with
% \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*bblbst>
% This is babelbst.tex for English.
% It should serve as a model for other languages.
% Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex)
% and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex.
\def\bbland{and} \def\bbletal{et~al.}
\def\bbleditors{editors} \def\bbleds{eds.}
\def\bbleditor{editor} \def\bbled{ed.}
\def\bbledby{edited by}
\def\bbledition{edition} \def\bbledn{edn.}
\def\bblvolume{volume} \def\bblvol{vol.}
\def\bblof{of}
\def\bblnumber{number} \def\bblno{no.}
\def\bblin{in}
\def\bblpages{pages} \def\bblpp{pp.}
\def\bblpage{page} \def\bblp{p.}
\def\bbleidpp{pages}
\def\bblchapter{chapter} \def\bblchap{chap.}
\def\bbltechreport{Technical Report}
\def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.}
\def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis}
\def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis}
\def\bblfirst{First} \def\bblfirsto{1st}
\def\bblsecond{Second} \def\bblsecondo{2nd}
\def\bblthird{Third} \def\bblthirdo{3rd}
\def\bblfourth{Fourth} \def\bblfourtho{4th}
\def\bblfifth{Fifth} \def\bblfiftho{5th}
\def\bblst{st} \def\bblnd{nd} \def\bblrd{rd}
\def\bblth{th}
\def\bbljan{January} \def\bblfeb{February} \def\bblmar{March}
\def\bblapr{April} \def\bblmay{May} \def\bbljun{June}
\def\bbljul{July} \def\bblaug{August} \def\bblsep{September}
\def\bbloct{October} \def\bblnov{November} \def\bbldec{December}
%</bblbst>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \Finale